468 views

Uploaded by Bharadwaj Subramaniam

- Mechanics Notes
- Examples 4
- Experiment 2 Kinematics of Human Motion
- Circular, Periodic and Rotational Motion
- Derivation Kinematic Eqns
- Logical Reasoning (32)
- Circular Motion
- Kinema Tics
- 35SliderCrankMechanism (1)
- Free Fall example 1
- P182A-05.042.Newtons2ndLaw
- m1 - Revision Checklist
- Class 9 Science 8
- Capa Batman
- I1
- 9th Science Physics Sample Paper 2012
- 11_kinematics_wksht2
- forze
- 01_Kinematics.pdf
- fhdfghfdgh

You are on page 1of 285

General Physics

9. Assignment (Subjective Problems)

LEVEL-I

1. 10 rotations of the cap of a screw gauge is equivalent to 5 mm. The cap has 100

dimensions. Find the least count. A reading taken for the diameter of wire with

the screw gauge shows 4 complete rotations and 35 on the circular scale. Find

the diameter of the wire.

2. A certain pendulum clock with a 12hr dial happens to gain 1 min/day. After setting

the clock to the correct time how long it will take to indicate correct time again?

3. The mass of a block is 87.2g and its volume is 25cm3. What are its density upto

correct significant figures?

4. The radius of a sphere is (5.3 0.1) cm. Find the percentage error in its volume.

is given by the energy

A B

E = 6 + 12 . Find the dimensions of A and B.

r r

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

Part-I-PH-GP-2

LEVEL-II

mass 190 gm is filled with alcohol, and the total mass is found to be 390 gm.

When it is heated by using a 50 W heater for 9 minute the following reading were

recorded with a thermometer and stop watch.

Time (minute) 0 1.5 3 4.5 6 7.5 9

Temperature ( C) 25 38 49 58 65 70 75

Find the specific heat capacity of alcohol. It is not required to take the radiation

correction into account.

MI

2. Suppose, the torque acting on a body, is given by = KL +

Where L = angular momentum, I = moment of inertia & = angular speed

What is the dimensional formula for KM?

3. When a current of (2.5 0.1)A flows through a wire it develops a potential

difference of (20 1)V. What is the resistance of wire?

g

in T and are x and y respectively?

revolution is T, while the average distance of the planet from the star is a. It is

known that there exists a relationship between them: find it. Assume the

dimensional expression for G.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

Part-I-PH-GP-3

LEVEL- I

1. ML 1T 2

is the dimensional formula of

(A) force (B) coefficient of friction

(C) modulus of elasticity (D) energy

2. The dimensional formula of coefficient of viscosity is

(A) MLT 1 (B) M 1L2 T 2

(C) ML 1T 1

(D) none of these

3. On the basis of dimensional equation, the maximum number of unknown that can

be found, is

(A) one (B) two

(C) three (D) four

4. If v stands for velocity of sound, E is elasticity and d the density, then find x in the

x

d

equation v .

E

(A) 1 (B)

(C) 2 (D) 1/2

5. The multiplication of 10.610 with 0.210 upto correct number of significant figure is

(A) 2.2281 (B) 2.228

(C) 2.22 (D) 2.2

measurement of its area is

(A) 1% (B) 2%

(C) 3% (D) none of these

7. Dimensional formula of latent heat

(A) M0L2T-2 (B) MLT-2

(C) ML 2T-2 (D) ML2T-2

8. In case of measurement of g, if error in measurement of length of pendulum is

2%, the percentage error in time period is1 %. The maximum error in

measurement of g is

(A) 1 % (B) 2 %

(C) 4 % (D) no error.

9. If length of pendulum is increased by 2%. The time period will

(A) increases by 1% (B) decreases by 1%

(C) increases by 2% (D) decreases by 2%

10. If radian correction is not considered in specific heat measurement. The

measured value of specific heat will be

(A) more than its actual value. (B) less than its actual value.

(C) remains same as actual value. (D) none of these.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

Part-I-PH-GP-4

(A) Watt K-1mol-1 (B) N K-1mol-1

(C) JK-1mol-1 (D) erg K-1mol-1

(A) ML2T-2 (B)MLT-1

(C) ML -1T-1 (D) M1L1T-2

the maximum percentage error in a, b and c are 1%, 3% and 2% respectively,

the maximum percentage error in x will be

(A) 13% (B) 17%

(C) 14% (D) 11%

(A) ML2T-3 -1 (B) ML2T-2 -4

(C) ML 2T-2 -1 (D) MLT-3 -1

15. Three measurements 7.1J, 7.2J and 6.7J are made as experiment the result with

correct number of significant figures is

(A) 7.1 J (B) 7.06 J

(C) 7.0 J (D) 7J

radiation energy striking a unit area per second, then non-zero integers x, y and

z, such that PxQycz is dimensionless, may be

(A) x = 1, y =1, z = 1. (B) x = 1, y = 1, z = 1.

(C) x = 1, y =1, z = 1. (D) x = 1, y = 1, z = 1

17. A spherical ball of mass m and radius r is allowed to fall in a medium of viscosity

. The time in which the velocity of the body increases from zero to 0.63 times

the terminal velocity is called time constant ( ). Dimensionally can be

represented by

mr 2 6 mr

(A) (B)

6 g2

m

(C) (D) none of these.

6 r

(A) Velocity gradient (B) Pressure gradient

(C) Displacement gradient (D) Force gradient

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

Part-I-PH-GP-5

19. In specific resistance measurement of a wire using a meter bridge, the key k in

the main circuit is kept open when we are not taking readings. The reason is

(A) the emf of cell will decrease.

(B) the value of resistance will change due to joule heating effect.

(C) the galvanometer will stop working.

(D) none of these.

20. In the experiment of verification of Ohms law the error in the current

measurement is 1%, while that in the voltage measurement is 2%. The error in

the resistance has a maximum value of

(A)1% (B) 2%

(C) 3% (D) none of these.

LEVEL - II

(A) [ML2T-2] (B) [MLT-2] (C) [ML-2T-1] (D) [ML2T-1]

2. Which of the following are not the dimensional formula for kinetic energy?

(A) [M2L2T] (B) [ML2T-2] (C) [M0L-1] (D) [ML2T]

(A) Pressure = Energy per unit area

(B) Pressure = Energy per unit volume

(C) Pressure = Force per unit volume

(D) Pressure = Momentum per unit volume per unit time

dv

4. Given that: F A ,

dx

dv

where F is force, A is area and velocity gradient, then which of the following are not

dx

the dimensional formula of ?

(A) [ML-1T-1] (B) [ML-1T] (C) [ML-2T-2] (D) [ML2T-1]

5. A particle moving along a straight line with uniform acceleration has velocities 7 m/s at

P and 17 m/s at Q,R is the mid point of PQ. Then:

(A) the average velocity between R and Q is 15 m/s

(B) the ratio of time to go from P to R and that from R to Q is 3:2

(C) the velocity at R is 10 m/s

(D) the average velocity between P and R is 10 m/s

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

Part-I-PH-GP-6

LEVEL - III

1. Column I Column II

(A) Amount of substance (P) Second

(B) Time (Q) Kelvin

(C) Temperature (R) Mole

(D) Electric current (S) Ampere

(T) Kilogram

2. Column I Column II

(A) Speed (P) MLT1 1 2

(T) M0L1T 1

3. The unit of force and length are doubled, the unit of energy will be ____ times.

the current and time. If the maximum error in the measurement of these quantities is 1%,

2% and 1% respectively, the maximum error in the determination of the dissipated heat

is ___%.

5. The relative density of a material is found by weighing the body first in air and then in

water. If the weight in air is (10.0 0.1) gm and weight in water is (5.0 0.1) gm then the

maximum permissible percentage error in relative density is ____%

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

Part-I-PH-GP-7

LEVEL - I

3. 3.5g/cc 4. 5.7%

LEVEL-II

1. 2300 J/kg-k 2. T4

3. (8 0.7) 4. (y+2x)

1/2

5. T= (GM) a 3/2

LEVEL -I

1. C 2. C

3. C 4. D

5 B 6. B

7. A 8 C

9. A 10. A

11. C 12. A

13. A 14. D

15. C 16 B

17. C 18. C

19. B 20. C

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

Part-I-PH-GP-8

LEVEL-II

LEVEL-III

1. A-R, B-P, C-Q, D-S

2. A-T, B-P, C-Q, D-R

3. 4

4. 6

5. 5

***

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-KM-PH-65

KINEMATICS

10. Assignment (Subjective Problems)

LEVEL I

1. A cricketer hits a ball from the ground level with a velocity v 0 = (20 i + 10 j )

m/sec. Find the velocity of the ball at t = 1 sec, from the instant of projection

(g = 10 m/sec2).

2. A body is projected vertically up with a speed V0. Find the magnitude of time

average velocity of the body during its ascent.

magnitude 100 m/sec at an altitude of 1 km. What is the displacement during the

time of its flight?

4. A football player kicks the football so that it will have a hang time (time of flight)

of 5s and lands 50 m away. If the ball leaves the players foot 1.5m above the

ground, what is its initial velocity (magnitude and direction)? (g = 10 m/sec2)

5. A rocket is fired vertically up from the ground with a resultant vertical acceleration

of 10 m/s2. The fuel is finished in 1 minute and it continues to move up

(a) what is the maximum height reached ?

(b) After how much time from then will the maximum height be reached?

(Take g = 10 m/s2 )

6. A ball is falling from the top of a cliff of height h with an initial speed V. Another

ball is simultaneously projected vertically up with the same speed. When do they

meet ?

7. If an object travels one-half its total path in the last second of its fall from rest,

find (a) the time and (b) the height of its fall. Explain the physically unacceptable

solution of the quadratic time equation.

8. A particle starts moving due east with a velocity v1 = 5 m/sec. for

10 sec. and turns to north with a velocity v2 =10 m/sec. for 5 sec. Find the

average velocity of the particle during 15 sec. from starting.

9. A particle is moving with a speed v0 in a circular path of radius R. Find the ratio of

average velocity to its instantaneous velocity when the particle describes an

angle (< /2).

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-KM-PH-66

10. To a man moving due east with a speed v in a rain, the rain appears to fall

vertically. If he changes his speed by a factor n, the rain appears to fall at an

angle to vertical. Find the speed of the rain.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-KM-PH-67

LEVEL II

1. Two particles are projected horizontally in opposite directions with v1 & v2 from

the top of a pole. If the particles move perpendicular to each other just before

striking the ground, find the height of the pole.

2. A cannon fires successively two shells with velocity vo = 250 m/s; the first at the

angle 1 = 60o and the second at the angle 2 = 45o to the horizontal, the

azimuth being the same. Neglecting the air drag, find the time interval between

firings leading to the collision of the shells.

3. An aeroplane flies in still air at a speed of 400 km/hr. Air is blowing from the

south at a speed of 50 km/hr. The pilot wants to travel from point A to point B

north-east of A and then to return. Calculate the direction he must steer (a) on

his onward journey (b) on his return journey. If the distance AB is 1000 km then

calculate the time taken in two journeys.

initial moment the particles were located at one point in space and moved with

velocities v1 = 3.0 m/s and v2 = 4.0 m/s horizontally in opposite directions. Find

the distance between the particles at the moment when their velocity vectors

become mutually perpendicular.

velocity v of the particle as w = a v, where a is a positive constant. At the initial

moment the velocity of the point is equal to vo. What distance will it traverse

before it stops? What time will it take to cover that distance?

6. Find the ratio between the normal and tangential acceleration of a point on the

rim of a rotating wheel when at the moment when the vector of the total

acceleration of this point forms an angle of 30 with the vector of the linear

velocity.

its motor is switched off, the fan uniformly slows down and performs 75

revolutions before it comes to a stop. How much time elapsed from the moment

the fan was switched off to the moment it stopped?

8. A motor cyclist, going due east with a velocity of 10 m/s, finds that the wind is

blowing directly from the north. When he doubles his speed, he finds that the

wind is blowing from north east. In what direction and with what velocity is the

wind blowin?.

distance as a x . Find the distance covered by the particle when its speed

becomes twice the initial speed.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-KM-PH-68

10. An observer in a train moving with a uniform velocity finds that a car moving

parallel to the train has a speed of 10 km/h in the direction of motion of the train.

An object falls from the car and the observer in the train notices that the car has

moved on for one minute, turned back, and moved with a speed of 10 km/h and

picked up the object two minutes after turning. Find

(a) the velocity of the train relative to the ground and

(b) the velocity of the car during its forward and reverse journeys.

Assume that the object comes to rest immediately on fall from the point of

view of the observer on the ground.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-KM-PH-69

LEVEL- I

1. A stone is released from an elevator going up with acceleration 5 m/s2. The

acceleration of the stone after the release is:

(A) 5 ms-2 (B) 4.8 ms-2 upward

(C) 4.8 down ward (D) 9.8 ms-2 down ward

(A) straight line (B) circle

(C ) ellipse (D) parabola

3. A car accelerates from rest at constant rate of 2 m/s2 for some time. Then its

retards at a constant rate of 4 m/s2 and comes to rest. What is the maximum

speed attained by the car if it remains in motion for 3 seconds

(A) 2 m/s (B) 3 m/s

(C) 4 m/s (D) 6 m/s

4. The co-ordinates of a moving particle at any time t are given by x = ct2 and

y = bt2. The speed of the particle is given by:

(A) 2t (c + b) (B) 2t (c 2 b2 )

(C) t (c 2 b2 ) (D) 2t (c 2 b2 )

such that at all instant the y axis component of its

v

position vector is constant and is equal to b. The

angular velocity of the particle about the origin is

v v

(A) (B) sin

b b O x

v

(C) sin2 (D) vb

b

ratio of times to attain height h(h < H) is 1/3, then h equals

(A) 2/3. H (B) 3/ 4. H

(C) 4/3 . H (D) 3/2. H

extensible string passing over the 1

pulleys 1,2,3 & 4 as shown in the 2

figure If all the pulleys are smooth and A

3 4

the boy walks with constant velocity of

magnitude v, the magnitude of relative V B

velocity between the boy and the

wedge is equal to

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-KM-PH-70

(A) v (B) 2v

(C) 1.5v (D) 1.25v

8. A swimmer wishes to reach directly opposite bank of a river, flowing with velocity

8 m/s. The swimmer can swim 10 m/s in still water. The width of the river is 480

m. Time taken by him to do so:

(A) 60 sec (B) 48 sec

(C) 80 sec (D) None of these

9. A man can swim at a speed of 5 km/h w.r.t. water. He wants to cross a 1.5 km

wide river flowing at 3 km/h. He keeps himself always at an angle of 60 o with the

flow direction while swimming. The time taken by him to cross the river will be

(A) 0.25 hr. (B) 0.35 hr.

(C) 0.45 hr. (D) 0.55 hr.

10. A disc of radius R is rotating inside a room A boy standing near the rim of the

disc, finds the water droplets falling from the ceiling is always hitting on his head.

As one drop hits his head the next one starts from the ceiling. If height of the

roof above his head is H. Angular velocity of disc is:

2gR 2gH

(A) 2

(B)

H R2

2g 2g

(C) (D) 2

H H

along a straight line is as shown in figure. At what 10

time the particle acquires its initial velocity?

(A) 12 sec.

(B) 5 sec.

(C) 8 sec.

(D) 16 sec. 4 t(sec.)

12. What are the speeds of two objects if they move uniformly towards each other,

they get 4m closer in each second and if they move uniformly in the same

direction with the original speeds they get 4m closer in each 10 sec ?

(A) 2.8 m/s and 1.2 m/s (B) 5.2 m/s and 4.6 m/s

(C) 3.2 m/s and 2.1 m/s (D) 2.2 m/s and 1.8 m/s

13. From the top of a tower, a stone is thrown up. It reaches the ground in 5 sec. A

second stone is thrown down with the same speed and reaches the ground in

1sec. A third stone is released from rest and reaches the ground in

(A) 3 sec. (B) 2 sec.

(C) 5 sec. (D) 2.5 sec.

(4 i 3j ) m/s2. Its speed after one second will be equal to

(A) 0 (B) 10 m/sec

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-KM-PH-71

15. A balloon starts rising from the ground with an acceleration of 1.25 m/s2. After 8

seconds, a stone is released from the balloon. After releasing, the stone will

(A) cover a distance of 40 m till it strikes the ground.

(B) have a displacement of 50 m till it reaches the ground

(C) reach the ground in 4 seconds.

(D) begin to move down instantaneously

16. Two balls are dropped from the top of a high tower with a time interval of t0

second, where t0 is smaller than the time taken by the first ball to reach the floor

which is perfectly inelastic. The distance S between the two balls, plotted against

the time lapse t from the instant of dropping the second ball is best represented

by

(A) (B)

S S

t t

O O

(C) (D)

S S

t t

O O

17. The K.E. (K) of a particle moving along a circle of radius R depends on the

distance covered s as K as 2 . The force acting on particle is

2as2 2as

(A) (B) 1/2

R s2

1

R

1/2

s2

(C) 2as 1 (D) none of these.

R2

18. Two particles P and Q start from rest and move for equal time on a straight line.

Particle P has an acceleration of X m/s2 for the first half of the total time and 2x

m/s2 for the second half. Particle Q has an acceleration of 2X m/s2 for the first

half of the total time and X m/s2 for the second half. Which particle has covered

larger distance?

(A) Both have covered the same distance

(B) P has covered the larger distance

(C) Q has covered the larger distance

(D) data insufficient

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-KM-PH-72

19. A particle is moving in a circle of radius R in such a way that at any instant the

normal and tangential components of its acceleration are equal. If its speed at

t = 0 is v0 the time taken to complete the first revolution is

(A) R/v0 (B) v0 /R

(C) R/v0 (1 e-2 ) (D) R/v0 (e-2 )

20. A motor boat of mass m moves along a lake with velocity v0. At t = 0, the engine

of the boat is shut down. Resistance offered to the boat is equal to v. What is

the total distance covered till it stops completely?

mv 0 3mv 0

(A) (B)

2

mv 0 2mv 0

(C) (D)

2

LEVEL- II

x t3

1. A particle moves along positive branch of the curve y where x , x and y

2 3

are measured in metres and t in seconds, then

1

(A) the velocity of particle at t = 1 s is i j

2

1

(B) the velocity of particle at t = 1 s is i j

2

(C) the acceleration of particle at t = 2 s is 2i j

(D) the acceleration of particle at t = 2 s is i 2j

is released from rest at the position, shown in fig. If v2,a2

initial acceleration of blocks A and B are a1 and a2 B

respectively and during the motion velocities of A and

B are v1 and v 2 respectively, then :

A v1

(A) a1 a2 cos (B) a2 a1 cos 1

small smooth pulley rigidly attached to trolley

A. If speed of trolley is constant and equal to

VA. Speed and magnitude of acceleration of A

(A) vB = vA, aB = 0 (B) aB = 0 x=3cm

3 16v A B

(C) vB vA (D) aB

5 125

with the horizontal then

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-KM-PH-73

(A) center of curvature of projectiles trajectory at the highest point is below the

ground level if tan 1 2

(B) centre of curvature of projectiles trajectory at the highest point is above the

ground level if tan 1 2

(C) center of curvature of projectiles trajectory at the highest point is above

ground level if tan 1 2

(D) center of curvature of projectiles trajectory at the highest point is below the

ground level is tan 1 2

allowed to slide down from rest and from

same height h along two smooth inclined h

planes having different angles of inclination

and . Then

(A) the final speed velocity acquired by them

will be the same

(B) the final speed acquired by them will be

different

(C) the times taken by them to reach the bottom will be the same

(D) the times taken by them to reach the bottom will be in the ratio (sin /sin )

(A) if its speed is constant it has no acceleration

(B) if its speed is increasing the acceleration of the particle is along its direction

of motion

(C) if its speed is constant the magnitude of its acceleration is proportional to its

curvature.

(D) the direction of its acceleration cannot be along the tangent.

from the point x = 0, and comes to rest at t = 1 sec at the point x = 1. No other

information is available about its motion at intermediate times (0 < t < 1). If

denotes the acceleration of the particle then,

(A) cannot remain positive for all t in the interval 0 t 1.

(B) | | can not exceed 2at any point in its path.

(C) | | must be 4 at some point or points in its path.

(D) must change sign during the motion, but no other assertion can be made

with the information given :

(A) if the velocity is zero at any instant, the acceleration should also be zero at

that instant

(B) if the velocity is zero for a time interval, the acceleration is zero at any instant

within the time interval

(C) if the velocity and acceleration have opposite sign, the object is slowing down

(D) if the position and velocity have opposite sign, the particle is moving towards

the origin

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-KM-PH-74

9. A particle initially at rest is subjected to two forces. One is constant, the other

is a retarding force proportional to the particle velocity. In the subsequent motion

of the particle :

(A) the acceleration will increase from zero to a constant value

(B) the acceleration will decrease from its initial value to zero

(C) the velocity will increase from zero to maximum & then decrease

(D) the velocity will increase from zero to a constant value.

10. Which of the following statements are true for a moving body?

(A) If its speed changes, its velocity must change and it must have some

acceleration

(B) If its velocity changes, its speed must change and it must have some

acceleration

(C) If its velocity changes, its speed may or may not change, and it must have

some acceleration

(D) If its speed changes but direction of motion does not change, its velocity may

remain constant

COMPREHENSIONS

Comprehension I:

Using the concept of relative motion, answer the following Y

question. Velocity of the river with respect to ground is given by

V0. Width of the river is d. A swimmer swims (with respect to V0

d

water) perpendicular to the current with acceleration a = 2t

O X

(where t is time) starting from rest form the origin O at t = 0.

(A) (D)1/3 (B) (2d)1/3

(C) (3d)1/3 (D) Information is insufficient

(A) V0(D)1/3 (B) V0(2d)1/3

(C) V0(3d)1/3 (D) None of these

x3 x2

(A) y (B) y

3V03 2V02

x x

(C) y (D) y

V0 V0

Comprehension II :

When a particle is projected at some angle with the horizontal, the path of the

particle is parabolic in nature. In the process the horizontal velocity remains

constant but the magnitude of vertical velocity changes. At any instant during

flight the acceleration of particle remains g in vertically downward direction.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-KM-PH-75

During flight at any point the path of particle can be considered as a part of circle

and radius of that circle is called the radius of curvature of the path of particle.

Consider that a particle is projected with velocity u = 10 m/s at an angle = 60

with the horizontal then :

4. The radius of curvature of path of particle at the instant when the velocity vector of the

particle becomes perpendicular to initial velocity vector is

20 10

(A) m (B) m

3 3 3 3

40 80

(C) m (D) m

3 3 3 3

(A) 10 m/s 2 (B) 5 3 m / s2

(C) 5 m/s2 (D) 10 3 m / s2

(A) 10 m/s 2 (B) 20 m/s2

(C) 5 m/s2 (D) 5 3 m / s2

Column A Column B

(A) Initial velocity vector (p) 60 3 i 40 j

(B) Velocity just after 3 sec (q) 30 3 i 10 j

(C) Displacement just after 2 sec (r) 30 3 i 30 j

(D) Velocity just after 2 sec (s) 30 3 i

Column II

Column I (velocitytime graph)

(accelerationtime graph)

(A) +a (p)

V

t

a

t

(B) (q)

a V

t t

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-KM-PH-76

(C) (r)

a

V

t

t

(D) (s)

a

V

t t

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-KM-PH-77

LEVEL - I

2. Find the maximum height reached.

3. Vertical displacement of bomb = 1km

Horizontal displacement of bomb = velocity of plane time of flight.

4. Vertical displacement of the projectile is 1.5 meter and horizontal displacement

is 50 meter.

5. Find velocity of the rocket after 1 minute.

6. They meet when their separation is zero.

7. Use kinematical equations.

8. Use vector method to find out displacement vector.

9. First find out time to move through an angle . Then find the displacement during

this time and average velocity.

10. Draw the vector diagram clearly.

LEVEL- II

2. Write equations for their positions at a time t. Solve these equations.

3. Draw the vector diagram clearly in two cases. Note that velocity of plane in still

air + velocity of air = velocity of plane in blowing air.

dv

5. Deceleration equals to v = a v.

dx

6. Normal acceleration is (v2/R) while tangential acceleration is R .

7. Use simple kinematical equations.

8. Draw the vector diagram clearly.

dv

9. Acceleration; a = v = x.

dx

10. Velocity of car as observed from train

= velocity of car relative to ground velocity of train relative to ground.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-KM-PH-78

LEVEL - I

v0

1. 20 i 2.

2

3. 1732 m, tan-1(0.707) 4. 26.64 m/s, 67.96

h

5. (a) 36 km (b) 1 minute 6.

2v

5 2

7. (a) 3.4 sec (b) 57m 8. due north of east

3

2 sin 2

9. 10. v 1 n2 cot 2

LEVEL II

v1v 2

1.

2g

2v 0 sin 1 2

2. t , 10.7 sec.

g cos 1 cos 2

3. (a) 390 56 north of east, 2.3 hour (b) 390 56 west of south, 2.75 hour

4. 2.5 m

2 2 vo

5. v 3/2

0 ,

3a a

ar 1

6.

at 3

7. 10 sec

8. 10 2 m/s, from north west

4

3v 0 3

9.

2

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-KM-PH-79

LEVEL - I

1. (D) 2. (A)

3. (C) 4. (D)

5. (C) 6. (C)

7. (D) 8. (C)

9. (B) 10. (C)

11. (C) 12. (D)

13. (C) 14. (C)

15. (C) 16. (D)

17. (C) 18. (C)

19. (C) 20. (A)

LEVEL II

COMPREHENSIONS

1. (C) 2. (C)

3. (A) 4. (A)

5. (A) 6. (C)

MATCH THE FOLLOWING

2. (A) (q); (B) (r); (C) (s) ; (D) (p)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-LOM-PH-31

LAWS OF MOTION

9. Assignments (Subjective Problems)

LEVEL I

A

1. Two blocks A and B of masses M1 and M2 B

respectively kept in contact with each other on a F

M1

M2

smooth horizontal surface. A constant horizontal

force (F) is applied on A as shown in figure. Find

the acceleration of each block and the contact

force between the blocks

ceiling of a trolley by a light inextensible string. If the a

trolley accelerates horizontally, the string makes an

m

angle = 30 o with the vertical. Find the acceleration of

the trolley.

inextensible string passing over a smooth m1 m2

pulley are in equilibrium on a fixed smooth

wedge as shown in the figure. Find the ratio of

the masses. Given that = 600 and = 300.

k

4. Both the springs shown in Figure are k

distance x and released, what will be the

initial acceleration?

F

5. A block of mass m = 1 kg is at rest on a rough horizontal m

surface having coefficient of static friction 0.2 and kinetic

force 0.15. Find the frictional forces if a horizontal force (a)

F = 1 N, (b) F = 1.96 N and (c) F = 2.5 N are applied on a

block which is at rest on the surface.

connected by a light inextensible string. A horizontal force F = 1 N is applied on

m1. Find the acceleration of either block. Describe the motion of m1 and m2 if the

string breaks but F continues to act.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-LOM-PH-32

0.3. (a) What can be the maximum angle of the incline with the horizontal so

that the block does not slip on the plane? (b) If the incline makes an angle /2

with the horizontal, find the frictional force on the block.

8. A 20 kg box is dragged across a rough level floor having a coefficient of kinetic

friction of 0.3 by a rope which is pulled upward at angle of 30 to the horizontal

with a force of magnitude 80 N.

(a) What is the normal force?

(b) What is the frictional force?

(c) What is the acceleration of the box?

(d) If the force is reduced until the acceleration becomes zero, what is the tension

in the rope?

= 2.10 m. The coefficient of friction between

the body and the wedge surface is k = 0.140.

For what value of the anlge will the time of

sliding be the least? What will it be equal to?

10. A chain of length is placed on a smooth spherical surface of radius R with one

of its ends fixed at the top of the sphere. What will be the acceleration a of each

element of the chain when its upper end is released? It is assumed that the

length of the chain < ( R/2).

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-LOM-PH-33

LEVEL II

acceleration a0 = g/2. The base of the wedge has a length L. Find the time

taken by a particle sliding down the incline to reach the base.

2. A body of mass 2 kg is lying on a rough inclined plane of inclination 30. Find the

magnitude of the force parallel to the incline needed to make the block move (a)

up the incline (b) down the incline. Coefficient of static friction = 0.2.

3. A spring has its end fixed to the ceiling of the elevator rigidly. It has spring

constant = 2000 N/m. A man of mass 50 kg climbs along the other end of the

spring vertically up with an acceleration of 2 m/s2 relative to the elevtater. The

elevater is going up with retardation 3 m/s2. Find extension in the spring.

4. A bar of mass m resting on a smooth horizontal plane starts moving due to the

force F = mg/3 of constant magnitude. In the process of its rectilinear motion the

angle between the direction of this force and the horizontal varies as = as,

where a is a constant, and s is the distance traversed by the bar from its initial

position. Find the velocity of the bar as a function of the angle .

are sliding down an inclined surface of inclination 30. The friction coefficient

between the block of mass 2.0 kg and the inclines is 1, and that between the

block of mass 4.0 kg and the incline is 2. Calculate the acceleration of the 2.0 kg

block if (a) 1 = 0.20 and 2 = 0.30, (b) 1 = 0.30 and 2 = 0.20. Take g = 10 m/s2.

due to gravity g. The weight of the balloon, with its basket and contents, is w.

What weight, w, should be released so that the balloon will begin to accelerate

upward with constant acceleration a? Neglect air resistance.

between the block B and C is 0.4. There is no B

from rest, find the distance moved by the block A

C when block A descends through a height 2m. Given masses of the blocks are

mA = 3 kg, mB = 5 kg and mC = 10 kg.

F

8. Two masses m1 and m2 are connected by

means of a light string, that passes over a light

pulley as shown in the figure. If m1 = 2kg and

m2 = 5 kg and a vertical force F is applied on

the pulley then find the acceleration of the m2

m1

masses and that of the pulley when

(a) F = 35 N (b) F = 70 N (c) F = 140 N

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-LOM-PH-34

M F

walls of block of mass m and the plank of mass M is . The

same co-efficient of friction is there between the plank and

the horizontal floor. The force F is of 100 N and the masses

m and M are of 1 kg and 3 kg respectively. Find the value

of , if the block does not slip along the wall of the plank.

surface of a wedge of mass M. The bar is connected to

an inextensible string passing over a light smooth m

pulley fitted with the wedge. The string is connected to M

the vertical wall. The angle of inclination of the slant

surface of the wedge is . If all contacting surfaces are

smooth, find the acceleration of the wedge.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-LOM-PH-35

LEVEL I

(A) There is no force acting on it

(B) The forces acting on it are not in a contact with it

(C) The combination of forces acting on it balance each other

(D) The body is in vacuum

constant horizontal force F applied on Z horizontally. Assuming there is negligible

friction, the ratio of tension in string connecting XY and YZ is:

(A) 2:1 (B) 3:2

(C) 1:2 (D) 2:3

frictionless table, when a horizontal force of 3.0 N is applied to the block of mass

2 kg the value of the force of contact between the two blocks is:

(A) 4 N (B) 3 N

(C) 2 N (D) 1 N

jet releasing water at a rate of 1 Kg/sec and at a speed of 5m/sec. The initial

acceleration of the block will be:

(A) 2.5 m/sec2 (B) 5.0 m/sec2

(C) 10 m/sec2 (D) none of above

particle then:

(A) Velocity is constant (B) Acceleration is constant

(C) KE is constant (D) None of these

6. Two masses M1 and M2 are attached to the ends of string which passes over the

pulley attached to the top of a double inclined plane. The angles of inclination of

the inclined planes are and . Take g = 10 ms-2. If M1 = M2 and = , what is

the acceleration of the system?

(A) zero (B) 2.5 ms-2

(C) 5 ms-2 (D) 10 ms-2

7. Starting from rest, a body slides down a 45 inclined plane in twice the time it

takes to slide down the same distance in the absence of friction. The coefficient

of friction between the body and the inclined plane is:

(A) 0.33 (B) 0.25

(C) 0.75 (D) 0.80

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-LOM-PH-36

body is suspended from the roof of the trolley car by an inextensible string of

length l, the corresponding tension in the string will be

(A) mg (B) mg cos

(C) mg sin (D) None of these

inclination . The coefficients of static and kinetic friction are 1 and 2

respectively. If the block is pushed down at the verge of slipping, assuming <

tan-1 1, Its acceleration down the plane is :

(A) g[Sin - 1 Cos ] (B) g[Sin - 2 Cos ]

(C) g( Sin - 1 Cos ] (D) g

(dM/dt) = v. The acceleration of satellite is:

(A) -2v2/M (B) - v2/M

(C) - v2/2M (D) - v2

11. Three blocks are connected on a horizontal frictionless table by two light strings,

one between m1 and m2, another between m2 and m3 . The tensions are T1

between m1 and m2 and T2 between m2 and m3. if m1 = 1 kg, m2 = 8 kg, m3 = 27

kg and F = 36 N applied on m3, then T2 will be

(A) 18 N (B) 9 N

(C) 3.375 N (D) 1.75 N

1

shown in figure. Change in linear momentum F

between 0 and 8 s is:

(A) Zero (B) 4 N-s

0 8

(C) 8 Ns (D) None t

mass m. If a force F is applied at one end of the rope, the force which the rope

exerts on the block is:

(A) F/(M+m) (B) F

(C) FM/(m+M) (D) 0

14. A chain of length L and mass M is hanging by fixing its upper end to a rigid

support. The tension in the chain at a distance x from the rigid support is:

(A) Zero (B) F

(L x ) (L x )

(C) Mg (D) Mg

L M

15. Two masses m and m are tied with a thread passing over a pulley, m is on a

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-LOM-PH-37

gravity is g, the acceleration of m in this arrangement will be

(A) g (B) g/(m+ m )

(C) g/m (D) g/(m- m )

16. A block of mass 0.1 kg is held against a wall by applying a horizontal force of 5 N

on the block. If the coefficient of friction the block and the wall is 0.5, the

magnitude of the frictional force acting on the block is:

(A) 2.5 N (B) 0.98 N

(C) 4.9 N (D) 0.49 N

horizontal floor. The coefficient of friction between A and B is 0.2 while that

between B and floor is 0.5. When a horizontal force of 25 N is applied on the

block B. The force of friction between A and B is:

(A) Zero (B) 3.9 N

(C) 5.0 N (D) 49 N

18. A ball weighing 10 gm hits a hard vertical surface with a speed of 5m/s and

rebounds with the same speed. The ball remains in contact with the surface for

(0.01) sec. The average force exerted by the surface on the ball is:

(A) 100 N (B) 10 N

(C) 1 N (D) 0.1 N

fixed together by a massless spring. A

force F acts on the mass B as shown in figure. At the instant shown the mass A

has acceleration a. What is the acceleration of mass B?

(A) (F/M)-a (B) a

(C) -a (D) (F/M)

takes time t to reach the bottom. If the same objective is allowed to slide down a

rough inclined plane of same inclination , it takes nt to reach the bottom where n

is a number greater than 1. The coefficient of friction is given by

(A) = tan (1 1/n2) (B) = cot (1 1/n2)

(C) = tan (1 1/n2)1/2 (D) = cot (1 1/n2)1/2

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-LOM-PH-38

LEVEL II

=0 m

F

(A) the acceleration of m w.r.t. ground is M F

m

(B) the acceleration of m w.r.t. ground is zero A B

2 m

(C) the time taken by m to separate from M is

F

2 M

(D) the time taken by m to separate from M is

F

machine placed in a cabin. The cabin is joined by a string with a

body of mass m. Assuming no friction, and negligible mass of cabin

and weighing machine, the measured mass of man is (normal force

between the man and the machine is proportional to the mass)

Mm mg

(A) measured mass of man is (B) acceleration of man is

(M m) (M m)

Mg

(C) acceleration of man is (D) measured mass of man is M.

(M m)

wedge of mass M. Calculate the value of M and tension in

the string, so that the block of mass m will move vertically

downward with acceleration 10 m/s2 Smooth

(Take g = 10 m/s2)

Mcot

(A) the value of M is

1 cot

M tan

(B) the value of M

1 tan

Mg

(C) the value of tension in the string is

tan

g

(D) the value of tension is

cot

through a massless inextensible string. Block of

mass m1 is placed at the fixed rigid inclined surface m1=4kg m2=2kg

while the block of mass m2 hanging at the other end Fixed

30

of the string, which is passing through a fixed

massless frictionless pulley shown in figure. The

coefficient of static friction between the block and the

inclined plane is 0.8. The system of masses m1 and

m2 is released from rest.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-LOM-PH-39

(B) the contact force by the inclined surface on the block is along normal to the inclined

surface

(C) the magnitude of contact force by the inclined surface on the block m1 is 20 3N

(D) none of these

is observed that the pulley in the figure moves upward F

with a uniform velocity of 2 m/s. The possible value(s) light pulley

of F is/are (in newtons)

(A) 150 (B) 120 g=10m/s2

(C) 75 (D) 400.

10kg 6kg

Ground

6. The coefficient of friction of all the surfaces is .

The string and the pulley are light. The blocks T1 T1

A 2m

are moving with constant speed. Choose the

correct statement T1 T1

F 3m

B

(A) F = 9 mg (B) T1 = 2 mg

(C) T1= 3 mg (D) T1 = 4 mg

10 kg 20 kg F

by a light spring as shown. A force of 200 N acts

on a 20 kg mass as shown. At a certain instant

F = 200 N

the acceleration of 10 kg mass is 12 ms-2.

(a) At that instatnt the 20 kg mass has an acceleration of 2 ms-2

(b) At that instant the 20 kg mass has an acceleration of 4ms-2

(c) The stretching force in the spring is 120 N

(d) Spring force have different magnitudes for both blocks.

(a) the frame is inertial

(b) resultant force on the particle is zero

(c) the frame may be inertial but the resultant force on the particle is zero

(d) the frame may be non-inertial but there is a nonzero resultant force

9. A particle is observed from two frames S1 and S2. The frame S2 moves with respect to

S1 with an acceleration . Let F1 and F2 be the pseudo forces on the particle when seen

from S1 and S2 respectively. Which of the following are not possible?

(a) F1 = 0, F2 0 (b) F1 0, F2 = 0

(c) F1 0, F2 0 (d) F1 = 0, F2 = 0

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-LOM-PH-40

as shown in figure. Let a1 be the acceleration of the

M m

wedge and a2 the acceleration of block. N1 is the

normal relation between block and wedge and N2 the

normal reaction between wedge and ground. Friction is

absent everywhere. Select the correct alternative (s)

(c) N1 sin q = M | a1 | (d) ma2 Ma1

COMPREHENSIONS

Comprehension I:

A car engine is so constructed as to exert a torque onto the wheels causing them to

rotate, and the wheels move forward on the road due to static friction. The force of static

friction, acting between the wheels and the road, is responsible for the forward

acceleration of the car. The force of static friction has an upper limit, known as the

limiting force of static friction proportional to the normal reaction between the wheels

and the road; this limits the maximum forward acceleration of the car.

In recent years, there has been a tendency to design lighter and more fuel efficient cars,

which drive faster than conventional cars. At very high speeds, it is observed that

conventional cars lose out on manoevrability, as friction is no longer sufficient. This is

caused by airflow around the body of the car, which produces pressure differentials that

increase the tendency of the car to get airborne. Modern designers have tried to

manipulate this airflow so as to reduce lift, decrease drag, and in some cases even

cause a downward force resulting in better traction.

1. A motorist, driving a car on a level road, desires to take a tight circular turn of radius r at

a constant speed v. The coefficient of static friction between the wheels of the car is S

and that of kinetic friction is K. He will be able to take this turn without skidding if

(choose the most appropriate option)

gr gr

(A) K (B) S

v2 v2

gr v2

(C) S , K (D) S

v2 rg

2. The car drives onto a bridge, which is convex upward, maintaining a constant speed v.

The driver, when he is on the bridge,

(A) can take a tighter turn, than when he is on a level road.

(B) cannot take a tighter turn, than when he is on a level road.

(C) can take a turn of the same radius as he could on a level road.

(D) can take tighter turns when he is getting upon the bridge, and looser turns when he

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-LOM-PH-41

Assume that the driver always takes a full circular turn without skidding.

3. The car is driven at a very high constant speed v, on a straight level road. This causes a

lift L to act on the car due to airflow. The force of friction (f) acting between the driving

wheels and the road (choose the most appropriate option)

(A) is zero, since the car is moving with constant velocity.

(B) Satisfies f = S mg, where m is the mass of the car.

(C) Satisfies f = S (mg L), assuming that the wheels do not lose contact with the road.

(D) Satisfies f = D, where D is the resultant backward force on the car due to air drag

and other contact forces.

Comprehension II :

If a man is measuring his actual weight by

weighing machine as shown in the figure.

The mass of man is 60 kg, mass of

weighing machine is 20 kg and mass of lift

is 30 kg (pulley is smooth and string is

massless).

(Take g = 10 ms2)

(A) 6600 N (B) 1800 N

(C) 1110 N (D) 800 N

(A) 30 ms2 (B) 18.5 ms2

(C) 110 ms2 (D) 13.3 ms2

(A) 600 N (B) 900 N

(C) 800 N (D) 1110 N

1. On a rough surface

Column A Column B

(A) Body is stationary it is possible that (p) Frictional force acting on it is zero

(B) Body is just about to move (q) Frictional force acting on it is static

(C) Body is moving with uniform (r) Frictional force acting on it is limiting

acceleration then it is possible that frictional force

(D) Body is moving with uniform (s) Frictional force acting on it is kinetic

velocity

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-LOM-PH-42

String1

horizontal system, as shown. For a particular

value of F, 3 kg block is just about to leave 5kg 37 3kg 1kg F

3

ground. (tan 37 = )

4

Column II

Column I

(A) Tension in string 1 (p) 80 N

(B) Tension in string 2 (q) 64 N

(C) Net force by ground on 5 kg block (r) 50 N

(D) Net force on 3 kg block (s) 24 N

5kg

3. In the above arrangement all pulleys are light =0.5

A

and frictionless, threads are ideal, = 0.5 at all 4kg

surfaces. 37 B =0.5

C 2.5kg

Column I Column II

(A) Net force on block A (p) 0

(B) Net force on block B (q) 5

(C) Net force on block C (r) 10

(D) Tension in string (s) 20

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-LOM-PH-43

LEVEL-I

1. Draw the F.B.D. and find the forces acting on A & B. Vertical forces will balance

each other and apply Newton's second law in horizontal

2. Draw the F.B.D. and resolve the forces in vertical and horizontal direction, write

down eqs. and find a.

3. Draw the F.B.D. and resolve all forces along and perpendicular to plane, apply

Newton's second law.

4. F=ma

a=2kx/m 2 k x

F

6. a

m1 m2

8. a = g(sin - cos )

T mg= 0

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-LOM-PH-44

LEVEL-II

1. Pseudo force (ma0) and weight mg act vertically downward. Resolve along the

incline.

3. a = m2g/(m1+m2)

6. Find acceleration of mass relative to earth. Then apply Newtons second law.

7. First consider relative motion between the blocks. Find common acceleration

and sec whether Fe = Mc .a flim

8. Draw the F.B.D. of pulley block system .Find the maximum tension

corresponding to the force F and check whether motion is possible or not.

If possible then apply equations of motion and constraint relation for the

accelerations of masses and pulley.

9. mg ma

F g(M m)

g .

M m

(M + m) g F - 2 g (M + m)

dv

10. Write the acceleration as v and integrate.

ds

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-LOM-PH-45

LEVEL I

F M2F

1. a= ,N 2. 5.7 m/s2

M1 M2 M1 M2

m1 1 2kx

3. 4.

m2 3 m

5. (a) 1N (b) 1.96 N (c) 1.5 N

F 1

6. m / s2 , m2 will move with constant velocity and m will accelerate

m1 m2 7

7. (a) tan-1 s = tan-1 0.3 = 16.70 (b) 0.145 mg

8. (a) 160 N, (b) 48 N (c) 1.06 m/s2 (d) 55.42 N

1

9. tan 2 = - , = 490 , tmin= 1.0 s

k

10. (Rg/l) / {1- cos(l/R) }

LEVEL II

16L

1. 2. (a) 13.46 N (b) 0

3 3g

2 wa

5. 3.7 m/s2, 2.97 m/s2 6.

g a

7. 2m.

15 15

8. (a) a1 = a 2 = 0 = ap (b) a1 = m/s2, a2 = 0 , ap = m/s2

2 4

29

(c) a1 = 25 m/s2, a2 = 4 m/s2, ap = m/s2

2

mg sin

9. = 0.5 10.

M 2m(1 cos

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-LOM-PH-46

LEVEL I

1. (C) 2. (C)

3. (D) 4. (A)

5. (C) 6. (A)

7. (C) 8. (B)

9. (B) 10. (B)

11. (B) 12. (B)

13. (C) 14. (C)

15. (B) 16. (B)

17. (B) 18. (B)

19. (A) 20. (A)

LEVEL II

3. (A), (D) 4. (A), (B), (C)

5. (A), (B) 6. (A), (B)

7. (B), (C) 8. (C), (D)

9. (D) 10. (A), (B), (C)

COMPREHENSION

12. (D) 13. (A)

14. (C) 15. (A)

MATCH THE FOLLOWING

1. (A) (p), (q), (r); (B) (q), (r); (C) (s); (D) (s)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-WEP-PH-31

7. Assignments (Subjective Problems)

LEVEL I

attains a velocity of 10 m/s. How much work is done by the resistance of the air

on the object? (g = 10m/s2).

km per hour by an engine. If the resistance due to friction be 10 N per metric ton,

calculate the power of the engine. If the steam is shut off, how far will the train

move before it comes to rest?

A

3. Shown in the figure is a smooth

vertical frame of wire along which B

H

a small bead moves from the point h

A. Find its speed at the point B.

4. A rubber ball after falling through a height h penetrates into the water through a

distance x. Find the average force imparted by water on the rubber ball in ideal

conditions.

kW. If the resistance to motion, assumed constant is 1000 N, find the maximum

speed at which the bus can travel on level road and the acceleration when it's

travelling at 25 m/s.

v0

smooth inclined plane of inclination with a

speed v0. ( 2gl sin ) as shown in the l

figure. Find the maximum height travelled m

by the particle.

The block compresses the spring by x. Calculate the maximum momentum of the

block.

reference moving in opposite directions on equatorial line with same speed (w.r.t

earth) are not equal.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-WEP-PH-32

9. A small mass m starts from rest and slides down the smooth spherical surface of

R. Assume zero potential energy at the top. Find (a) the change in potential

energy (b) the kinetic energy (c) the speed of the mass as a function of the angle

made by the radius through the mass with the vertical.

10. An ideal massless spring can be compressed

by 1 m by a force of 100 N. This same spring is

placed at the bottom of a frictionless inclined

plane which makes an angle = 30o with the

horizontal. A 10 kg mass is released from rest

o

at the top of the incline and is brought to rest 30

momentarily after compressing the spring 2

meters.

(a) Through what distance does the mass slide before coming to rest?

(b) What is the speed of the mass just before it reaches the spring?

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-WEP-PH-33

LEVEL - II

v

to a block of mass M. The system is moving m

with a constant velocity v on a smooth M

with a wall, find the maximum compression

of the spring before it recoils, assuming that

the total energy is conserved.

angle of inclination . The co- efficient of friction between the body and the plane

is . What is the net work done by friction during the ascent of the body, comes

to stop.

3. A block of mass m slides from the top of an inclined plane of angle of inclination

& length l. The coefficient of friction between the plane and the block is . Then it

is observed cover a distance d along the horizontal surface having the same

coefficient of friction , before it comes to a stop. Find the value of d.

acted upon by a force delivering a constant power P. If the initial velocity of the

particle is zero, then find its displacement as a function of time t.

connected to a light spring of stiffness k. R

Another identical ball B is connected with

the ball A by a light inextensible string as B /4

shown in the figure. Other end of the

spring is fixed. Initially the spring is in

relaxed position. A vertical force F acts m1

What is the work done by the force in pulling the ball B till the ball A reaches at

the top of the cylindrical surface. The ball A remains in contact with the surface

and co-

(Fig.) by a force F which at each point was directed

along a tangent to the trajectory. Find the work m

h

performed by this force, if the height of the hill is h,

the length of its base l, and coefficient of kinetic l

friction k.

varying with time as wn = at2, where a is a constant. Find the time dependence of

the power developed by all the forces acting on the particle, and the mean value

of this power averaged over the first t seconds after the beginning of motion.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-WEP-PH-34

displaced through a distance keeping the string straight & released, find the

speed of the bob at the lowest position.

9. A body is projected from the top of a smooth fixed frictionless semi circular

vertical tube of radius R with a speed gR . Find the speed of the body when it

descends through a vertical distance R/2.

spring of stiffness k, are kept on a smooth horizontal

surface as shown in the figure. What should be the

initial compression of the spring so that the system will

be about to break off the surface, after releasing the

m2

block m1?

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-WEP-PH-35

LEVEL I

1. Two bodies of masses m1 and m2 have equal momenta. Their kinetic energies E1

and E2 are in the ratio:

(A) m1 : m2 (B) m1 : m2

(C) m2 : m1 (D) m12 : m22

2. A chain of mass M, length hangs from a pulley. If it is wound such that half of

the chain remains overhung, the work done by the external agent is equal to

Mg 3

(A) (B) Mg

2 4

3

(C ) Mg (D) None of these

8

from an elevator. The elevator is accelerating

upward with uniform acceleration a. The work

done during t secs by the tension in the thread is: m

m m

(A) ( g a )at 2 (B) ( g a)at 2

2 2

m

(C) gat2 (D) 0.

2

vertically, principally because:

(A) the friction is reduced

(B) the mass becomes smaller

(C) only a part of the weight has to be overcome

(D) g becomes smaller

5. A motor boat is travelling with a speed of 3.0 m/sec. If the force on it due to water

flow is 500 N, the power of the boat is:

(A) 150 KW (B) 15 KW

(C) 1.5 KW (D) 150 W

6. Two masses of 1 gm and 4 gm are moving with equal kinetic energies. The ratio

of the magnitudes of their linear momenta is:

(A) 4 : 1 (B) 2 : 1

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-WEP-PH-36

(C) 1 : 2 (D) 1 : 16

7. A system of two bodies of masses m

and M being interconnected by a k

spring of stiffness k moves towards a m

rigid wall with a K.E. E . If the body M M

sticks to the wall after the collision, the

maximum compression of the spring

will be

m.E 2m.E

(A) (B)

k (M m)k

2m.E 2M.E

(C ) (D)

Mk (M m)k

stiffness k is pushed by a force F as shown in the figure. The maximum potential

energy stored in the spring is equal to:

F2 F2

(A) (B) F

2k 4k

F2

(C) (D) None of these

8k

9. A stone tied to a string of length is whirled in a vertical circle with the other end

of the string at the centre. At a certain instant of time, the stone is at its lowest

position and has a speed u. The magnitude in its velocity as it reaches a

position, where the string is horizontal, is

(A) u2 2g (B) 2g

(C) u2 g (D) 2(u2 g )

constant downward acceleration g/4. The work done by the chord is

(A) mgd/4 (B) 3Mgd/4

(C) -3Mgd/4 (D) Mgd

11. A uniform chain of length L and mass M is lying on a smooth table and one-third

of its length is hanging vertically down over the edge of the table. If g is

acceleration due to gravity, the work required to pull the hanging part onto the

table is:

(A) MgL (B) MgL/3

(C) MgL/9 (D) MgL/18

cross-section A. If the speed with which the liquid passes through a pipe is v,

then the rate of liquid flow is

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-WEP-PH-37

2

(C) Adv /2 (D) Adv2

13. A body of mass m accelerates uniformly from rest to v1 in time t1. As a function of

t, the instantaneous power delivered to the body is:

(A) mv1/t1 (B) mv12/t1

(C) mv1t2/ t1 (D) mv12t/t12

mass 80 Kg runs up the stair case in 20 s. The ratio of the power developed by

them will be:

(A) 1 (B) 4/3

(C) 16/9 (D) None of the above

15. How much work is done in raising a stone of mass 5 Kg and relative density 3

lying at the bed of a lake through height of 3 meter? (Take g = 10 ms-2):

(A) 25 J (B) 100 J

(C) 75 J (D) None of the above

ground on a rough hemispherical surface

upto the top of the hemisphere with the R

help of a light inextensible string as m

shown in the figure. The radius of the

hemisphere is R. The work done by the

tension in the string is:

(A) mgR(1+ ) (B) mgR

(C) mgR(1- ) (D) mg(R/2).

17. A small mass m is sliding down on a smooth m

curved incline from a height h and finally

k

moves through a horizontal smooth surface. A h

light spring of force constant k is fixed with a

vertical rigid stand on the horizontal surface,

as shown in the figure. The maximum

compression in the spring if the mass m

released from rest from the height h and hits

the spring on the horizontal surface is:

2mgh mgh

(A) (B)

k k

mgh

(C) (D) None of these.

2k

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-WEP-PH-38

spring of stiffness k on a smooth horizontal v k

plane. If it compresses the spring through a m

momentum of the block is:

(A) 2 km x 0 (B) 0

(C) km x 0 (D) - 2 km x 0 .

19. If v, P and E denote the velocity, momentum and kinetic energy of the particle,

then:

(A) P = dE/dv (B) P = dE/dt

(C) P = dv/dt (D) none of these

20. Energy required to accelerate a car from 10 to 20 m/s compared with that

required to accelerate from 0 to 10 m/s is

(A) twice (B) four times

(C) three times (D) same

LEVEL II

circular path of radius l in horizontal plane about O with constant v

O

speed v, as shown in the figure. The average force exerted by l

string on the bob during its :

m

A

mv 2 2mv 2

(A) half revolution will be (B) half revolution will be

l l

2mv 2

(C) one fourth revolution will be (D) one revolution will be zero

l

2. A ball of mass m attached to the lower end of a light vertical spring of force constant k.

The upper end of the spring is fixed. The ball is released from rest with the spring at its

normal (unstretched) length, and comes to rest again after descending through a

distance x

(A) x = mg/k

(B) x = 2mg/k

(C) the ball will have no acceleration at the position where it has descended through x/2

(D) the ball will have an upward acceleration equal to g at its lowermost position

B

block B, whose mass is half of A, is placed on A at one end and A

projected along A with some velocity u. The coefficient of friction

between the blocks is

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-WEP-PH-39

u

(A) the blocks will reach a final common velocity

3

(B) the work done against friction is two-thirds of the initial kinetic energy of B

(C) before the blocks reach a common velocity, the acceleration of A relative to B is

2

g

3

(D) before the blocks reach a common velocity, the acceleration of A relative to B is

3

g

2

4. The ring shown in the figure is given a constant m smooth horizontal rail

deflection of the string from the vertical is 0, l

then

(A) 0 = 30 particle

m

(B) 0 = 60

(C) at maximum deflection, tension in string is equal to mg

2mg

(D) at maximum deflection, tension in string is equal to

3

smooth floor at a distance l from a rigid wall. Block is k

m

pushed toward right by a distant 3l and released. When

2 l

block passes from its mean position another block of

mass m1 is placed on it which sticks to it due to friction so

that the combined block just collides with the left wall.

5m

(A) m1 .

8

5m

(B) m1 .

4

3 K

(C) Velocity of block m at mean position is

2 m

(D) Velocity of block m at mean position is

6. A heavy stone is thrown from a cliff of height h in a given direction. The speed with which

it hits the ground

(A) must depend on the speed of projection

(B) must be larger then the speed of projection

(C) must be independent of the speed of projection

(D) may be smaller than the speed of projection

7. You lift a suitcase from the floor and keep it on a table. The work done by you on the

suitcase does not depend on

(A) the path taken by the suitcase (B) the tame taken by you in doing so

(C) the weight of the suitcase (D) your weight

(A) the force is always perpendicular to its velocity

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-WEP-PH-40

(C) the object is stationary but the point of application of the force moves on the object

(D) the object moves in such a way that the point of application of the force remains

fixed

9. A particle of mass m is attached to a light string of length l, the other end of which is

fixed. Initially the string is kept horizontal and the particle is given an upward velocity .

The particle is just able to complete a circle.

(A) the string becomes slack when the particle reaches its highest point

(B) the velocity of the particle becomes zero at the highest point

1

(C) the kinetic energy of the ball in initial position was m 2 mg l

2

(D) the particle again passes through the initial position

(A) the resultant force on the particle must be parallel to the velocity at all instants

(B) the resultant force on the particle must be at an angle less than 90 all the time

(C) its height above the ground level must continuously decrease

(D) the magnitude of its linear momentum is increasing continuously

COMPREHENSION

Comprehension I :

strut

momentum if the external force acting on the

system is zero, the linear momentum of the M

system will remain conserved.

It means if the centre of mass of a system is initially at rest, it will remain at rest in the

absence of external force, that is the displacement of centre of mass will be zero. A

plank of mass M is placed on a smooth horizontal surface. Two light identical springs

each of stiffness K are rigidly connected to struts at the end of the plank as shown in the

figure. When the springs are in their unextended position the distance between their free

ends is 3 . A block of mass m is placed on the plank and pressed against one of the

springs so that it is compressed to l. To keep the block at rest it is connected to the strut

by means of a light string. Initially the system is at rest. Now the string is burnt.

5m 5m

(A) (B)

M M m

3m 4m

(C) (D)

M m M m

Km m

(A) (B)

(M m) (M m)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-WEP-PH-41

Km Km

(C) (D)

M(M m) (M m)

Km2 Km2

(A) (B)

2M(M m) M(M m)

KM 2

(C) (D) none of these

2(M m)

Comprehension II :

v0

A small particle of mass m is given an initial velocity v 0 tangent to A

r0

the horizontal rim of a smooth cone at a radius r0 from the vertical

centerline as shown at point A. As the particle slides to point B, a

r B

vertical distance h below A and a distance r from the vertical

centerline, its velocity v makes an angle with the horizontal v

tangent to the cone through B.

4. The value of is

1 v 0r0 1 v 0r0

(A) cos (B) cos

v 20 2gh(r0 h tan ) v 02 2gh(r0 h tan )

1 v 0r0 1 v 0r0

(C) cos (D) cos

v 20 2gh(r0 h tan ) r0 v 02 2gh

(A) v 02 2gh (B) v 02 2gh

(C) v 02 gh (D) 2v 02 2gh

6. The minimum value of v0 for which particle will be moving in a horizontal circle of radius

r0.

2gr0 gr0

(A) (B)

tan 2 tan

gr0 4gr0

(C) (D)

tan tan

1. A long wire PQR is made by joining two wires PQ and QR of equal radii. PQ has length

4.8 m and mass 0.06 kg. QR has length 2.56 m and mass 0.2 kg. The wire PQR is under

a tension of 80 N. A sinusoidal wave-pulse of amplitude 3.5 cm is sent along the wire PQ

from the end P. No power is dissipated during the propagation of the wave-pulse.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-WEP-PH-42

Column I Column II

(A) The time taken by the wave pulse to reach the (p) 0.14

other end R of the wire (in sec)

(B) The amplitude of the reflected wave pulses (q) 2.0

after the incident wave pulse cross the joint Q.

(in cm)

(C) The amplitude of the transmitted wave pulses (r) 32

after the incident wave pulse cross the joint Q.

(in cm)

(D) Velocity of wave in QR (in m/s) (s) 1.5

2. A particle of 500 gm mass moves along a horizontal circle of radius 16 m such that

normal acceleration of particle varies with time as an = 9t2.

Column II

Column I (given values are in proper unit)

(A) Tangential force on particle at t = 1 second (in (p) 72

Newton)

(B) Total force on particle at t = 1 second (in Newton) (q) 36

(C) Power delivered by total force at t = 1 second (in (r) 7.5

Newton)

(D) Average power developed by total force over first (s) 6

one second (in watt)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-WEP-PH-43

LEVEL I

2. Work done by engine + work done by gravity + work done by frictional force = 0, as

there is no change in kinetic energy.

3. Use conservative work concept

4. Work done by resistive force of water = change in K.E.

5. Use relation for power

6. Use work energy theorem

7. Consider F.B.D. of both the components

8. Resultant velocity of a train w.r.t. sun (heliocentric frame) = vector sum of velocity of

train w.r.t. earth velocity of earth.

9. (a) Decrease in P.E. = increase in K.E.

(b) Net force along radius and towards the centre provides the necessary centripetal

force.

10. Consider equilibrium of body and apply work energy.

LEVEL II

2. Use work energy theorem

3. Use conservation of energy to find out the velocity at the bottom of incline plane.

Then use work-energy theorem.

4. Use the concept of work.

5. Use work energy theorem.

6. Use work energy theorem.

7. Normal acceleration is given as time dependent, hence v is time dependent now find

dv /dt

8. Use work energy theorem (Note: work done by tension is zero)

9. Consider F.B.D. of the particle and apply work energy theorem

10. Think the condition of breaking off

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-WEP-PH-44

LEVEL I

h

3. 2g(H h) 4. mg 1

x

2

(v 2

0 2 g sin ) sin 2

5. 50 m./sec., 2 m/sec . 6. sin

2g

7. ( km ) x

LEVEL II

(3M m) mv 02

1. v 2.

3k 2(tan )

1/ 2

8Pt3

3. [sin - cos ]/ 4.

9m

1

5. mgR [ 1 ]

2 4 2

mRat

6. mg (h + kl) 7. P = mRat, <P> =

2

8. gl 9. 2gR

( 2m1 m2 )g

10.

k

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-WEP-PH-45

LEVEL I

1. (C) 2. (C)

3. (A) 4. (C)

5. (C) 6. (C)

7. (B) 8. (A)

9. (D) 10. (B)

11. (D) 12. (D)

13. (D) 14. (B)

15. (B) 16. (A)

17. (A) 18. (C)

19. (A) 20. (C)

LEVEL II

1. (B), (D) 2. (B), (C), (D)

3. (A), (B), (D) 4. (A), (D)

5. (B), (C) 6. (A), (B)

7. (A), (B), (D) 8. (A), (C), (D)

9. (A), (D) 10. (B), (D)

COMPREHENSION

1. (B) 2. (C)

3. (C) 4. (A)

5. (A) 6. (C)

MATCH THE FOLLOWING

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-C-PH-33

COLLISION

9. Assignments (Subjective Problems)

LEVEL I

1. Two particles A and B of which lighter particle has mass m, are released from

infinity. They move towards each other under their mutual force of attraction. If

their speeds are v and 2 v respectively find the K.E. of the system.

2. A bullet of mass 0.01 kg travelling at a speed of 500 m/s strikes a block of mass

2 kg which is suspended by a string of length 5 m. The centre of gravity of the

block is found to rise a vertical distance of 0.2 m. What is the speed of the bullet

after it emerges from the block?

3. A body of mass 1 kg initially at rest, explodes and breaks into three fragments of

masses in the ratio 1 : 1 : 3. The two pieces of equal mass fly off perpendicular to

each other with a speed of 15 m/s each. What is the velocity of the heavier

fragment?

4. Steel ball of mass 0.5 kg is fastened to a cord 20 cm long and fixed at the far end

and is released when the cord is horizontal. At the bottom of its path the ball

strikes a 2.5 kg steel block initially at rest on a frictionless surface. The collision is

elastic. Find the speed of the block, just after the collision.

5. A particle loses 25% of its energy during collision with another identical particle

at rest. Find the coefficient of restitution.

6. A body of mass 3 kg collides elastically with another body at rest and then

continues to move in the original direction with one half of its original speed.

What is the mass of the target body?

7. An automatic gun fires 600 bullets a minute. The mass of each bullet is 4 gm and

its initial velocity is 500 m/s. Find the mean impact force experienced by the gun.

m/s in a horizontal direction. Find the distance over which the skater will move

back if the coefficient of friction between the skaters and the ice is .

plate and rebounds to a height of h2 = 81 cm. Find: the impulse of the force

received by the plate during the impact.

10. A ball collides with an inclined plane of inclination after falling through a

distance h. If it moves horizontally just after the impact, find the coefficient of

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-C-PH-34

restitution.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-C-PH-35

LEVEL II

attached rigidly to a stationary sledge of mass M. Neglecting friction between all

contacting surface, find the maximum compression of the spring.

. The bucket is released from rest when the cord is in a horizontal position. In its

lowest position the bucket scoops up a mass m of water, what is the height of the

swing above the lowest position?

3. A uniform thin rod of mass M and length L is standing vertically along the y-axis

on a smooth horizontal surface, with its lower end at the origin (0,0). A slight

disturbance at t = 0 causes the lower end to slip on the smooth surface along the

positive x-axis, and the rod starts falling. (a) What is the path followed by the

centre of mass of the rod during its fall. (b) Find the equation of trajectory of a

point on the rod located at a distance r from the lower end. What is the shape of

the path of this point?

frictionless surface. A uniform cylinder of radius r and mass m is released from

rest at the top point A. The cylinder slips in the semicircular frictionless track.

How far the block moved when the cylinder reaches the bottom of the track?

A ball of mass m hits it with a vertical velocity v at its bottom. Find the change in

momentum of the ball assuming inelastic collision.

6. Two identical blocks A and B of mass M each are kept on each other on a

smooth horizontal plane. There exists friction between A and B. If a bullet of

mass m hits the lower block with a horizontal velocity v and gets embedded into

it. Find the work done by friction between A and B.

7. A cannon and a supply of cannon balls are inside a sealed railroad car. The

cannon fires to the right, the car recoils to the left. The cannon balls remain in the

car after hitting the far wall. Show that no matter how the cannon balls are fired,

the railroad car cannot travel more than , assuming it starts from rest

8. Two wooden blocks of mass M1 = 1 kg, M2 = 2.98 kg lie separately side by side

smooth surface. A bullet of mass m = 20 gm strikes the block M1 and pierces

through it, then strikes the second block and sticks to it. Consequently both the

blocks move with equal velocities. Find the percentage change in speed of the

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-C-PH-36

9. A steel ball is suspended by a light inextensible string of O

length from a fixed point O. When the ball is in equilibrium

it just touches a vertical wall as shown in the figure. The ball

is first taken aside such that string becomes horizontal and

then released from rest. If co-efficient of restitution is e, then

find the maximum deflection of the string after nth collision.

m v

placed on it rests on a smooth horizontal plane.

M

The disc is set in motion in the horizontal direction

with velocity v. To what height (relative to the

initial level) will the disc rise after breaking off the

body M? All surfaces are frictionless.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-C-PH-37

LEVEL I

1. If the KE of a body becomes four times of its initial value, then the new

momentum will be more than its initial momentum by;

(A) 50% (B) 100%

(C) 125% (D) 150%

2. A bullet in motion hits and gets embedded in a solid block resting on a frictionless

table. What is conserved?

(A) Momentum and KE (B) Kinetic energy alone

(C) Neither KE nor momentum (D) Momentum alone

(A) Lies always at the geometrical center

(B) Lies always inside the body

(C) Lies always outside the body

(D) Lies within or outside the body

4. The spacecraft of mass M moves with velocity V in free space at first, then it

explodes breaking into two pieces. If after explosion a piece of mass m comes to

rest, the other piece of space craft will have a velocity:

(A) MV/(M m) (B) MV/(M + m)

(C) mV/(M m) (D) mV/(M + m)

5. A bomb travelling in a parabolic path under the effect of gravity, explodes in mid

air. The centre of mass of fragments will:

(A) Move vertically upwards and then downwards

(B) Move vertically downwards

(C) Move in irregular path

(D) Move in the parabolic path the unexploded bomb would have traveled

(A) The earth remains stationary while the ball moves upwards

(B) The ball remains stationary while the earth moves downwards

(C) The ball and earth both moves towards each other

(D) The ball and earth both move away from each other

(A) The use of lead shield. (B) Passing them through heavy water.

(C) Elastic collision with heavy nucleus (D) Applying a strong electric field.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-C-PH-38

struck inelastically by an identical body of mass m with horizontal velocity

v = 2gl , the tension in the string increases just after the striking by

(A) mg (B) 3 mg

(C) 2 mg (D) None of these

9. A bullet weighing 10 gm and moving at 300 m/s strikes a 5 kg ice and drops

dead. The ice block is sitting on a frictionless level surface. The speed of the

block after the collision, is

(A) 6 cm/sec (B) 6 m/sec

(C) 60 mc/sec (D) 60 m/sec.

10. A massive ball moving with speed v collides with a tiny ball having a mass very

much smaller than the mass of the first ball. If the collision is elastic, then

immediately after the impact, the second ball will move with a speed

approximately equal to:

(A) v (B) 2v

(C) v/2 (D)

11. A bag of mass M hangs by a long thread and a bullet (mass m) comes

horizontally with velocity v and gets caught in the bag. Then for the combined

system (bag + bullet):

(A) Momentum is mMv/(M + m) (B) KE is (1/2) Mv2

(C) Momentum is mv (D) KE is m2v2/2(M + m)

12. A surface is hit elastically and normally by n balls per unit time, all the balls

having the same mass m and moving with the same velocity u. The force on the

surface is:

(A) mnu2 (B) 2mnu

2

(C) (1/2)mnu (D) 2mnu2

13. A bullet of mass m hits a target of mass M hanging by a string and gets

embedded in it. If the block rises to a height h as a result of this collision, the

velocity of the bullet before collision is:

(A) v 2gh (B) v 2gh [1 (m / M)]

(C) v 2gh [(1 M / m)] (D) v 2gh [1 (m / M)]

14. Two particles of mass M and 2 M are at a distance D apart. Under their mutual

force they start moving towards each other. The acceleration of their centre of

mass when they are D/2 apart is:

(A) 2 GM/D2 (B) 4 GM/D2

(C) 8 GM/D2 (D) Zero

15. A body of mass 1 kg initially at rest, explodes and breaks into three fragments of

mass in the ratio 1 : 1 :3. The two pieces of equal mass fly off perpendicular to

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-C-PH-39

each other with speed of 15 m/sec. each. The speed of havier fragment is:

(A) 5 2 m/s (B) 45 m/se

(C) 5 m/s (D) 156 m/s

16. A sphere of mass m1 = 2kg collides with a sphere of mass m2 = 3kg which is at

rest. Mass m1 will move at right angle to the line, joining centres at the time of

collision, if the coefficient of restitution is

(A) 4/9 (B) 1/2

(C) 2/3 (D) 23

17. In a free space, a rifle of mass M shoot a bullet of mass m at a stationary block of

mass M distance D away from it. When the bullet has moved through a distance

d towards the block, the centre of mass of the bullet-block system is at a distance

from rifle of

mD d dM m

(A) (B) from a rifle

M m M

md MD

(C) . (D) None of these.

M m

18. Two identical billiard balls are in contact on a table. A third identical ball strikes

them symmetrically and come to rest after impact. The restitution is

2 1

(A) (B)

3 3

1 3

(C) (D)

6 2

19. A sphere of mass m moving with a constant velocity hits another stationary

sphere of the same mass. If e is the coefficient of restitution, then ratio of

velocities of the two spheres after collision will be:

1 e 1 e

(A) (B)

1 e 1 e

e 1 e 1

(C) (D)

e 1 e 1

20. A neutron travelling with a velocity v and kinetic energy E collides elastically head

on with the nucleus of an atom of mass number A at rest. The fraction of total

energy retained by the neutron is:

2 2

A 1 A 1

(A) (B)

A 1 A 1

2 2

A 1 A 1

(C) (D)

A A

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-C-PH-40

LEVEL II

after colliding with a plane surface

1

(A) the angle made by the plane surface with the positive xaxis is 90 + tan1

3

1 1

(B) the angle made by the plane surface with the positive xaxis is tan

3

1 1

(C) the direction of change in momentum makes an angle tan with the +ve xaxis

3

1 1

(D) the direction of change in momentum makes an angle 90 tan with the

3

plane surface

(A) force acting on a particle for equal time intervals can produce the same change in

momentum but different change in kinetic energy

(B) force acting on a particle for equal displacements can produce same change in

kinetic energy but different change in momentum

(C) force acting on a particle for equal time intervals can produce different change in

momentum but same change in kinetic energy

(D) force acting on a particle for equal displacements can produce different change in

kinetic energy but same change in momentum

(A) the total kinetic energy of the system is always conserved

(B) the kinetic energy of the system before collision is equal to the kinetic energy of the

system after collision

(C) the linear momentum of the system is conserved

(D) the mechanical energy of the system before collision is equal to the mechanical

energy of system after collision

m/s. A second ball of mass 2 kg is released from rest from u=0

(A) The centre of mass of the two balls comes down with 4 m/s

acceleration g /3.

1 kg

(B) The centre of mass first moves up and then comes

down

(C) The acceleration of the centre of mass is g downwards

(D) The centre of mass of the two balls remains stationary.

horizontal table with coefficient of friction and are

joined by a spring. Initially, the spring has its natural

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-C-PH-41

m1, will make the other block m2 just move. (k is the

spring constant) and x is elongation in spring at that

instant.

m1g m2g

(A) F m2 g (B) x

2 k

m2g 2 m2g

(C) F m1g (D) x

2 k

6. A ball A of mass m moving with velocity n collides head on with a stationary ball B of

mass m. If e be the coefficient of restitution, then which of the following is correct?

1 e

(A) The ratio of velocities of balls A and B after the collision is

1 e

1 e

(B) The ratio of the final and initial velocities of ball A is

2

1 e

(C) The ratio of velocities of balls A and B after collision is

1 e

1 e

(D) The ratio of the final and initial velocities of the ball B is

2

7. When a bullet is fired from a gun

(A) Kinetic energy of bullet is more than that of gun

(B) Acceleration of bullet is more than that of gun

(C) Momentum of bullet is more than that of gun

8. A ball of mass m moving horizontally at a speed n collides with the bob of a simple

pendulum at rest. The mass of the bob is also m.

(A) If the collision is inelastic, the height to which the two balls rise after the collision is

v2

8g

(B) If the collision is inelastic, the kinetic energy of the system immediately after the

collision becomes half of that before collision

v2

(C) If the collision is perfectly elastic, the bob of the pendulum will rise to a height of

2g

(D) If the collision is perfectly elastic, the kinetic energy of the system immediately after

the collision is equal to that before collision

9. In which of the following cases the center of mass of a rod is certainly not at its centre?

(A) the density continuously increases from left to right

(B) the density continuously decreases from left to right

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-C-PH-42

(C) the density decreases from left to right upto the centre and then increases

(D) the density increases from left to right upto the centre and then decreases

10. A nonzero external force acts on a system of particles. The velocity and the acceleration

of the center of mass are found to be 0 and a0 at an instant t. It is possible that

(A) 0 = 0, a0 = 0 (B) 0 = 0, a0 0

(C) 0 0, a0 = 0 (D) 0 0, a0 0

COMPREHENSION

connected together by a light spring of stiffness K. The system

m 2m

is lying on a smooth horizontal surface with the block A in

A B

contact with a fixed vertical wall as shown in the figure. The

block B is pressed towards the wall by a distance x0 and then

released. There is no friction anywhere.

1. If spring takes time t to acquire its natural length then average force on the block A by

the wall is

2mK x 0

(A) 0 (B)

t

mK 0x Km x 0

(C) 3 (D)

2 t 3 t

2 K 4 K

(A) x0 (B) x0

3 2m 3 2m

K 1 K

(C) x0 (D) x0

2m 3 2m

3. If natural length of the spring is l, then maximum separation between the blocks is

x0

(A) (B) x0

3

x0

(C) (D) x0

3

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-C-PH-43

remains conserved. Coefficient of restitution e is

defined as ratio of velocity of separation and velocity of M

approach along line of impact. A disc of mass M and

radius of curvature R is lying on the ground (frictionless). V R

A small ball of mass M moving on the ground with a

velocity V strikes the disc and collides with it. The

coefficient of restitution being e.

(A) V cos (B) V sin

(C) V (D) zero

V cos eV cos

(A) (B)

2 2

V cos (1 e) V cos (1 e)

(C) (D)

2 2

cos2 (1 e)2

(A) eV cos (B) V sin2

4

sin2 cos2 (1 e)2

(C) V cos2 (1 e)2 (D) V sin2

4 4

1. A ball A of mass m1, initially moving with velocity u 1, collides with another ball B of mass

m2, moving with velocity u2 in a straight line in the same direction. After collision

velocities of the balls A and B are 1 and 2 respectively then (e is the coefficient of

restitution between the balls).

Column A Column B

(A) If u2 = 0, e = 1/2 and m1 >> m2 then (p)

u1

1

(B) If u2 = 0 , e = 1/3 and m2 >> m1 then (q)

3u1/2

1

(C) If u2 = 0, e = 1 and m1 >> m2 then 1 (r) u1/3

(D) If m1 = m2, u2 = 0, e = 1 then 2 1 = (s) Zero

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-C-PH-44

elongated by a distance of 3 cm and placed on C A B

smooth horizontal surface. When spring is in its

N

natural length (block A moving right and block B Spring constant K 200

is moving left) block C moving towards A with m

speed 0.4 m/s (towards right) collides and get

stuck with it.

Column I Column II

(in proper unit)

(A) Velocity of B before collision (m/s) (p) 0.1

(B) Velocity of center of mass of whole (q) 0.2

system after colliding (m/s)

(C) Amplitude of oscillation of combined (r) 0.03

body (m) (rounded off to one significant

figure)

(D) Loss of energy during collision (J) (s) 0.05

3. A body is initially moving towards right explodes into two pieces 1 and 2. Direction of

motion of the pieces is shown in Column I and possible mass ratio are shown in Column

II.

Column I Column II

(A) V1 (p) m1>m2

V2

(B) V1 (q) m1=m2

1

2

V2

(C) V1 (r) m1<m2

V2

(D) V1 (s) Impossible for any masses

1

2

V2

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-C-PH-45

LEVEL I

1. Apply COM.

2. Apply COM then COE.

3. Apply COM.

4. Apply COE then COM.

5. From KE find final velocity of first particle. Then apply conservation of linear

momentum

6. Apply COM .

7. Apply Newtons Second Law for variable mass.

8. Apply COM then relate work- energy.

9. Impulse equals to change of momentum

10. Remember momentum conservation along horizontal

LEVEL II

bodies is zero.

2. This is completely inelastic collision.

3. x coordinate of cm remains constant

4. x coordinate of cm remains constant

5. Apply COM

6. Apply COM

7. System cm has same x coordinate

8. Apply COM

9. Apply definition of e and apply COE

10. Apply COM in horizontal direction then apply COE.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-C-PH-46

LEVEL I

2

3. 5 2 m/sec. 4. m/sec.

3

5. 1/ 2 6. 1 kg

M2v 2

7. 20 N 8.

2m2 g

9. 0.171 kgm/sec. 10. e = tan2

LEVEL II

Mm

1. v 2. {M/(M+m)}2L

k(M m)

m

3. Straight line 4. (R r )

M m

Mmv 1 Mm 2 v 2

5. 6.

(M m) 2 (m 2M)((m M)

8. 25 %

v2 M

9. cos-1 (1e2n) 10.

2g M m

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P1-C-PH-47

LEVEL - I

1. (B) 2. (D)

3. (D) 4. (A)

5. (D) 6. (D)

7. (B) 8. (C)

LEVEL - II

COMPREHENSION

1. (B) 2. (B)

3. (A) 4. (A)

5. (C) 6. (B)

8. (A) (p); (B) (r); (C) (p); (D) (p)

9. (A) (p); (B) (p); (C) (r); (D) (s)

10. (A) (s); (B) (s); (C) (p), (q), (r); (D) (p), (q), (r)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-RM-24

ROTATIONAL MECHANICS

7. Assignment (Subjective Problems)

LEVEL I

horizontal surface as shown in the figure. Find

the minimum value of co-efficient of friction so

that ring will not slip. Also find

(a) the direction and the magnitude friction acting on the ring.

(b) acceleration of ring.

(c) angular acceleration of ring.

2. A disc is rotating about one of its diameters with a kinetic energy E. If the mass

and the radius of the disc are m and r respectively, find its angular momentum.

3. A solid uniform disk of mass m and radius R is pivoted about a horizontal axis

tangential to the rim of disc. A particle of mass m is attached to a point on the

rim of disk, diametrically opposite to the pivot. The combination is now released

from rest, with the plane of disc initially horizontal. Find the angular velocity

when the small particle reaches its lowest point.

while its angular velocity decreases from 600 rev min-1 to 540 rev. min-1. What

is the moment of inertia of the flywheel ?

5. A cord, with one end fixed to a horizontal ceiling, is wrapped over a flywheel of

radius 'r'. The wheel is allowed to fall. Find the angular acceleration of the

wheel and the tension in the cord.

6. A uniform disc of radius r, and mass `M kg can rotate without friction about a

fixed vertical axis passing through its center and perpendicular to its plane. A

cord is wound at the rim of the disc and a uniform force of F Newton is applied

on the cord. Find the tangential acceleration of a point on the rim of the disc.

7. A ball is thrown in such a way that it slides with a speed v0 initially without rolling

on a rough horizontal plane. Prove that it will roll without sliding when its speed

5

falls to v 0 .

7

8. A disc of mass m, radius r being wrapped over by a light and inextensible string

is pulled by force F at the free end of the string. If it moves on a smooth

horizontal surface, find (a) linear (b) angular acceleration of the disc.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-RM-25

1

coefficient of static friction between plane and cylinder is less than tan .

3

on a smooth horizontal plane. A particle of

A

mass m moving at a speed v A a V

perpendicular to the length of the rod a

4

strikes it at a distance a/4 from the centre m v m

and stops after the collision. Find

Before Collision After Collision

(a) the velocity of the centre of the rod

and

(b) the angular velocity of the rod about its

centre just after the collision.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-RM-26

LEVEL - II

1. A boy stands on a freely rotating platform with his arms stretched. His rotation

speed is 0.25 rev./s. But when he draws them in, his speed is 0.80 rev./s. Find

(a) the ratio of his moment of inertia in the first case to that in the second.

(b) the ratio of K.E. in the first case to that in the second.

collides with a light spring of stiffness K with a kinetic energy E. If the surface

(AB) under the spring is smooth, find the maximum compression of the spring.

v

A B

with a constant angular speed about a vertical

axis passing through its point of suspension. Find

the moment of inertia of the rod about the axis of

rotation if it makes an angle to the vertical (axis

of rotation) .

h m

on a smooth horizontal surface (shown R

in the figure) be hit by a cue that it will R

roll without sliding ?

interconnected by an inextensible and light

l m

string. M is in equilibrium due to revolution

of particle m. Now M is pulled down slowly

through a distance l/2. Find the change in

angular speed of particle m.

M

speed v = 2m/sec. If it rolls without slipping, find the maximum distance

traversed by it (g = 10 m/sec -2).

v

m

7. A bullet of mass m collides inelastically at the

R

periphery of a disc of mass M and radius R, with

a speed v. The disc rotates about a fixed O

M

horizontal axis. Find the angular velocity of the

disc bullet system just after the impact.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-RM-27

900 to each other. A laminar sheet of mass Q

30Kg is hinged at the line AB joining the two

heavy metallic plates. The hinges are P B

frictionless. The moment of inertia of the

laminar sheet about an axis parallel to AB and

passing through its centre of mass is 1.2 Kg-m2.

Two rubber obstacles P and Q are fixed, one on each metallic plates at a

distance 0.5 m from the line AB. This distance is chosen so that the reaction

due to the hinges on the laminar sheet is zero during the impact. Initially the

laminar sheet hits one of the obstacles with an angular velocity 1 rad/s and

turns back. If the impulse on the sheet due to each obstacle is 6N-s,

(a) Find the location of the centre of mass of the laminar sheet from AB.

(b) At what angular velocity does the laminar sheet come back after the first

impact?

(c) After how may impacts, does the laminar sheets come to rest..

9. A boy rolls a hoop over a horizontal path with a speed of 7.2 km/h. Over what

distance can the hoop roll uphill at the expense of its kinetic energy? The slope

of the hill is 1 in 10.

instant, it has translational velocity v0 in right direction and an angular velocity

v0

in clockwise sense. When its translational velocity is 0.75 v0. It has a

4R

perfectly elastic collision with a smooth vertical wall which is normal to its path.

Find the speed of the sphere when the sphere starts rolling.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-RM-28

LEVEL I

1. The ratio of the radii of gyration of a circular disc and a circular ring of the same

masses and radii about a tangential axis parallel to the their planes is

(A) 6 : 5 (B) 1 : 2

(C) 5 : 6 (D) none of these

2. A wheel of mass 2 kg having practically all the mass concentrated along the

circumference of a circle of radius 20 cm, is rotating on its axis with an angular

velocity of 100 rad/s. The rotational kinetic energy of the wheel is

(A) 4J (B) 70J

(C) 400 J (D) 800 J

and released. The angular velocity of the rod when it is in vertical position is

2g 3g

(A) (B)

L L

g g

(C) (D)

2L L

4. If a solid sphere, disc and cylinder are allowed to roll down an inclined plane

from the same height

(A) cylinder will reach the bottom first

(B) disc will reach the bottom first

(C) sphere will reach the bottom first

(D) all will reach the bottom at the same time

when it starts rolling

3

(A) 5/2 0R (B) 0R

2

5 2

(C) 0R (D) 0R

3 3

6. When there is no external torque acting on a body moving in elliptical path, which of

the following quantities remain constant

(A) kinetic energy (B) potential energy

(C) linear momentum (D) angular momentum

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-RM-29

and partly sliding. During this kind of motion of this sphere

(A) total kinetic energy is conserved

(B) angular momentum of the sphere about the point of contact with the plane is

conserved

(C) only the rotational kinetic energy about the centre of mass is conserved.

(D) angular momentum about the centre of mass is conserved.

8. A thin circular ring of mass M and radius R is rotating about its axis with a constant

angular velocity . Two objects, each of mass m are attached gently to the opposite

ends of the diameter of the ring. The wheel now rotates with an angular velocity.

(A) M/(M + m) (B) {(M - 2m)/(M +2m)}

(C) {M/(M + 2m)} (D) {(M + 2m)/M}

9. A sphere moving at some instant with horizontal velocity vc in right and angular

velocity in anti clockwise sense. If v c = R . The instantaneous centre of

rotation is

(A) at the bottom of the sphere (B) at the top of the sphere

(C) at the centre of the sphere (D) any where inside the sphere

10. A thin bar of mass M and length L is free to rotate about a fixed horizontal axis

through a point at its end. The bar is brought to a horizontal position and then

released. The angular velocity when it reaches the lowest point is

(A) directly proportional to its length and inversely proportional to its mass.

(B) independent of mass and inversely proportional to the square root of its length

(C) dependent only upon the acceleration due to gravity.

(D) directly proportional to its length and inversely proportional to the acceleration

due to gravity.

A and B on smooth horizontal floor. A force F is applied

perpendicular to AB so as to rotate the plate about A

A B

and B separately. If 1 & 2 are the corresponding r

accelerations for the cases then 1/ 2 will be

(A) 1

(B) <1

(C) > 1

(D) dependent on the force and the dimensions of the plate.

12. A uniform rod AB of mass m and length at rest on a smooth horizontal surface.

An impulse P is applied to the end B. The time taken by the rod to turn through

a right angle is

(A) m /12P (B) m /6P

(C) m / 6P (D) none of these

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-RM-30

with an ideal liquid of mass m. When the sphere

m

rolls with a velocity v kinetic energy of the system

is equal to

1

(A) mv2 (B) mv2

2

4 4

(C) mv2 (D) mv2

3 5

14. A string is wrapped several times round a solid cylinder and then the end of the

string is held stationary while the cylinder is released from rest with an initial

motion. The acceleration of the cylinder and tension in the string will be

2g mg mg

(A) and (B) g and

3 3 2

g mg g mg

(C) and (D) and

3 2 2 3

figure. The moment of inertia of the system about

an axis passing through O perpendicular to the

plane of the frame is equal to

m 2 m 2

(A) (B)

12 3

2

m m 2

(C) sin2 (D) sin

12 3

16. A cubical block of mass M and edge a slides down a rough inclined plane of

inclination with a uniform velocity. The torque of the normal force on the block

about its centre has a magnitude

(A) zero (B) Mga

(C) Mg(a/2)sin (D) Mga cos

17. A string of negligible thickness is wrapped several times around a cylinder kept

on a rough horizontal surface. A man standing at a distance from the cylinder

holds one end of the string and pulls the cylinder towards him. There is no

slipping anywhere. The length of the string passed through the hand of the man

while the cylinder reaches his hands is

(A) (B) 2

(C) 3 (D)

v0

rough horizontal surface and given a linear

velocity v0 and angular velocity 0 as shown. The 0

the right. It follows that

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-RM-31

(A) 3 v0 = 2 0 r (B) 2 v0 = 0 r

(C) v0 = 0 r (D) 2 v0 = 3 0 r

19. Two uniform solid spheres having unequal masses and unequal radii are

released from rest from the same height on a rough incline. If the spheres roll

without slipping,

(A) the heavier sphere reaches the bottom first

(B) the bigger sphere reaches the bottom first

(C) the two spheres reach the bottom together

(D) the information given is not sufficient to tell which sphere will reach the

bottom first.

20. A rod of mass m is released on smooth horizontal surface making angle with

horizontal. Then which of the following statement is incorrect.

(A) Acceleration of rod along vertical is less than g.

(B) Acceleration of centre of mass along horizontal is zero.

(C) Angular acceleration of rod is not constant.

(D) Momentum of the rod along vertical will remain constant.

LEVEL II

1. The mathematical statement v vc v ' , where v c is the velocity of centre of mass, v '

is the velocity of the point with respect to the centre of mass and v is the total velocity

of the point with respect to ground

(A) is true for a rolling sphere

(B) is true for a block moving on frictionless horizontal surface

(C) is true for a rolling cylinder

(D) none of these

F3 F2

2. A spool of wire rests on a horizontal surface as shown in

figure. As the wire is pulled, the spool does not slip at

contact point P. On separate trails, each one of the forces F4

F1, F2, F3 and F4 is applied to the spool. For each of these

F1

forces the spool

(A) will rotate anticlockwise if F1 is applied

P

(B) will not rotate if F2 is applied

(C) will rotate anticlockwise if F3 is applied

(D) will rotate clockwise is F4 is applied

instant, it has velocity v and acceleration a of c.m.

as shown in the figure. Acceleration of a

B

(A) A is vertically upwards v

(B) B may be vertically downwards A

(C) C cannot be horizontal

(D) Some point on the rim may be horizontal leftwards.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-RM-32

on a horizontal rigid surface (or the ground). At a B C.M. frame

certain instant, its position w.r.t. ground frame is as Y

shown in the figure. v

A X

(A) sector ABC has greater kinetic energy than sector O C

ADC w.r.t. ground frame

X

(B) sector BO C has greater kinetic energy than D

Ground frame

sector CO D w.r.t ground frame

(C) sector BO C has the same kinetic energy as sector AO B w.r.t. ground frame

(D) all the sectors AO B, BO C, CO D and AO D have same kinetic energy w.r.t. the

centre of mass frame

smooth rod lying on the same plane and which is hinged to rotate about a vertical axis

passing through one of its ends. Then,

(A) angular momentum of the system about any point is conserved

(B) linear momentum of the particle is conserved perpendicular to the rod

(C) kinetic energy of the system (rod + particle) remains unchanged after the collision

(D) linear momentum of the system (rod + particle) is conserved

6. In the figure shown, the plank is being pulled to the right with a constant speed v. If the

cylinder does not slip then:

(B) the speed of the centre of mass of the cylinder is zero.

(C) the angular velocity of the cylinder is v/R.

(D) the angular velocity of the cylinder is zero.

(A) after some time it may start pure rolling

(B) after sometime it will start pure rolling

(C) it may be possible that it will never start pure rolling

(D) none of these

(A) friction acting on a cylinder without sliding on an inclined surface is always upward

along the incline irrespective of any external force acting on it.

(B) friction acting on a cylinder without sliding on an inclined surface is may be upward

may be downwards depending on the external force acting on it.

(C) friction acting on a cylinder rolling without sliding may be zero depending on the

external force acting on it.

(D) nothing can be said exactly about it as it depends on the friction coefficient on

inclined plane.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-RM-33

9. A paritcle falls freely near the surface of the earth. Consider a fixed point O (not

vertically below the particle) on the ground.

(A) Angular momentum of the particle about O is increasing .

(B) Torque of the gravitational force on the particle about O is decreasing.

(C) The moment of inertia of the particle about O is decreasing .

(D) The angular velocity of the particle about O is increasing.

10. A body is in equilibrium under the influence of a number of forces. Each force has a

different line of action. The minimum number of forces required is

(A) 2, if their lines of action pass through the centre of mass of the body.

(B) 3, if their lines of action are not parallel.

(C) 3, if their lines of action are parallel.

(D) 4, if their lines of action are parallel and all the forces have the same magnitude.

COMPREHENSION

A

R is attached to a small smooth ring of mass m

B

kept at point A. The ring is threaded onto a x

horizontal fixed frictionless wire.

Initially the bigger ring is held horizontally alongside the wire in such a manner that

initially the planes of both the rings are at 90 to each other and the planes of smaller

and bigger rings are perpendicular to the plane of the paper (x-y plane). Now the bigger

ring is released from rest. After release the planes of smaller and bigger ranges remain

perpendicular to the plane of paper (x-y plane).

5 g g

(A) (B) 2

6 3R 3R

g g

(C) 10 (D)

85R 3R

5 gR

(A) gR (B) 8

3 85

20 4 gR

(C) gR (D)

15 3 3

3. Speed of point B is

gR gR

(A) (B) 2

3 3

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-RM-34

gR gR

(C) 4 (D) 12

3 85

4m

cylinder A of radius 4 m rolling without

slipping on the 8 kg plank which in turn is

8 kg

supported by a fixed smooth surface. Block

B, is known to accelerate down with 6 m/s 2.

(Take g = 10 m/s2) B

2 kg

2

6 m/s

4 2 6 2

(A) rad s (B) rad s

5 5

(C) 2 rad s2 (D) 1 rad s2.

5. What is the ratio of the mass of the cylinder to the mass of block B ?

(A) 1 (B) 2

(C) 3 (D) 4.

6. If unwrapped length of the thread between the cylinder and block B is 20 m at the

beginning, when the system was released from rest, what would it be 2 s later ?

(A) 28 m (B) 30 m

(C) 22 m (D) 32.5 m

C

1. A rigid body is rolling without slipping on the horizontal

surface :

B V

60

D

A

Column A Column B

(A) Velocity at point A i.e., V A (p) V 2

(B) Velocity at point B i.e., V B (q) Zero

(C) Velocity at point C i.e., VC (r) V

(D) Velocity at point D i.e., VD (s) 2V

2. A uniform disc is acted upon by some forces and it rolls on a horizontal plank without

slipping from north to south. The plank, in turn lies on a smooth horizontal surface.

Match the following regarding this situation :

Column II

Column I

(A) Frictional force on the disc by the (p) May be directed towards north

surface

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-RM-35

(B) Velocity of the lowermost point of the (q) May be directed towards south

disc

(C) Acceleration of centre of mass of the (r) May be zero

disc

(D) Vertical component of the acceleration (s) Must be zero

of centre of mass

3. In each case, there is sufficient friction for regular rigid uniform body to undergo pure

rolling on a rigid horizontal surface. Now Match the Column I and II

Column II

Column I

(A) (p) The direction of static friction may be

h F forward or may be backward or static

R friction may be zero

disc

(B) (q) The direction of static friction is

F towards backward

R

disc

(C) (r) The angular acceleration will be

R

clockwise

h

F

disc

(D) F

(s) Acceleration of the centre mass will

h be along direction F

disc

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-RM-36

9. HINTS (Subjective)

LEVEL- I

2. L=I

5. Draw FBD.

8. Draw FBD, apply Newton 2nd law, find torque and relate it to angular

acceleration.

9. Draw FBD on the inclined plane, assume backward friction apply 2nd law.

LEVEL- II

2. KEsphere = + PEspring = 0

md

3. I = r2 dm where r = sin , dm = .

0

6. KE + PE = 0

9. KE + PE = 0

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-RM-37

LEVEL- I

F F

1. opposite to the applied force , clockwise sense.

2M 2MR

mE

2. .R

2

12g

3. 4. 0.81 kg-m2

11r

g mg 2F

5. , 6.

2r 2 M

F 2F mv 3mv

8. (a) (b) 10. (a) V = (b) =

m mR M Ma

LEVEL II

10E

1. (a) 16/5 (b) 5/16 2.

7k

m 20 sin2 2

3. 4. R

3 3

Mg

5. 3 6. 0.56m

m

v 12 mv

7. 8. 0,

M (M 6m)

R 1

2m

9. 4m

v0

10.

28

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-RM-38

LEVEL - I

1. (C) 2. (C)

3. (B) 4. (C)

5. (C) 6. (D)

7. (B) 8. (C)

LEVEL - II

3. (A), (B), (C), (D) 4. (A), (B), (C), (D)

5. (C) 6. (B), (C)

7. (A), (C) 8. (B), (C)

9. (A), (C), (D) 10. (B), (C), (D)

COMPREHENSION

1. (C) 2. (B)

3. (D) 4. (D)

5. (B) 6. (A)

2. (A) (p), (q), (r); (B) (p), (q), (r); (C) (p), (q), (r); (D) (s)

3. (A) (p), (s), (r); (B) (q), (r), (s); (C) (q), (r), (s); (D) (p), (r), (s)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-GR-19

GRAVITATION

10. Assignment (Subjective Problems)

LEVEL I

1. Three identical bodies, each of mass m, are separated by a distance a and are

found to start moving towards one another under mutual force of gravitational

attraction. If at t = t0, the separation between any two is a/2, find the speed of

each body at time t0.

2. If the radius and density of a planet are two times and half respectively of those

of earth, find the intensity of gravitational field at planet surface and escape

velocity from planet.

3. A mass M is split into two parts m and (M m), which are the separated by a

m

certain distance. What ratio of maximizes the gravitational force between

M

the parts?

4. Four massive particles, each of mass m, are kept at the vertices of square of side

. With what speed should the system rotate in its plane about its centre so as to

remain stable?

5. Two concentric spherical shells have masses M1, M2 and radii R1, R2 (R1< R2).

What is the force exerted by this system on a particle of mass m if it is placed at

a distance (R1 + R2)/2 from the centre?

equator. At what height above the South Pole will it stretch the same spring to

the same length? Assume the earth to be spherical.

7. Find the radius of the circular orbit of a satellite moving with an angular speed

equal to the angular speed of earth's rotation.

8. What is the true weight of an object, that weighed exactly 10.0 N at the north

pole, at the position of a geostationary satellite?

9. What should be the period of rotation of the earth so that every object on the

equator is weightless?

10. A particle is fired vertically upward with a speed 15 km/s. (a) Show that it will

escape from the earth and (b) With what speed will it move in interstellar space?

Assume the presence of the earths gravitational field only.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-GR-20

LEVEL II

1. With what speed should a satellite be projected from earths surface so that it

starts resolving around earth at a height of 2600 km in circular orbit? (Radius of

earth = 6400 km, g at surface = 9.8 m/sec2)

2. A thin spherical shell of radius 3R and mass M and a hollow sphere of mass 3M

with R and 2R as internal and external radii are placed concentrically at O. Find

5R

the gravitational field & the gravitational potential at Q where OP = and

2

OQ = 4R.

3. Two small dense stars rotate about their common centre of mass, as a binary

system with the period of 1 year for each. One star is of double the mass of the

other and the mass of the lighter one is 1/3 the mass of the sun. The distance

between the earth and the sun is R. If the distance between two stars is r, then

obtain the relation between r and R.

d

gravitational force on the particle of L

mass m due to the rod?

5. A system consists of a thin ring of radius r and of mass M and a straight wire of

linear mass density of infinite length placed along the axis of the ring with one

of its ends at the centre of the ring. Find the force of interaction between the wire

and the ring.

6. Two massive particles of mass m1 and m2 are released from rest from a very

large distance. Find the speeds of the particles when their distance of separation

is r.

7. A particle of mass m is kept on the axis of a fixed circular ring of mass M and

radius R at a distance x from the centre of the ring. Find the maximum

gravitational force between the ring and the particle.

8. A double-star, with two stars masses m1 and m2, rotates with constant angular

speed. If the maximum distance of separation is R, then find the minimum value

of angular speed.

9. A projectile is fired vertically upward from the surface of earth with a velocity Kve

where ve is escape velocity and K<1. Neglecting air resistance, show that the

maximum height to which it will rise, measured from the centre of earth, is

R

where R is the radius of earth.

1 K2

10. A planet of mass m moves along an elliptical orbit around the sun so that its

maximum and minimum distances from the sun (mass = M) are equal to r1 and r2

respectively. Find the angular momentum of this planet relative to the sun.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-GR-21

LEVEL I

(A) 0.5 (B) 1

(C) 2 (D) no fixed number.

2. If the radius of earth were to shrink by one percent, its mass remaining the same,

the acceleration due to gravity on the earths surface would

(A) decrease (B) remains unchanged

(C) increase. (D) none of these

(A) areal velocity of a planet (B) nature of motion of a planet

(C) ratio of time periods of two planets (D) all the above

gravitational field, then work done per unit mass by the external agent is (at that

point)

(A) gravitational force (B) gravitational field intensity

(C) gravitation potential (D) none of the above

(A) winds (B) gravity

(C) clouds (D) none of the above.

R

(A) infinite (B) 2

g

g 1 R

(C) 2 (D)

R 2 g

(A) sometimes passes through the centre of earth

(B) does not pass through the centre of earth

(C) passes through the centre of earth always

(D) none of the above.

8. The earth revolves round the sun in an elliptical orbit. Its speed is

(A) going on decreasing continuously

(B) greatest when it is closest to the sun

(C) greatest when it is farthest from the sun

(D) constant at all the points on the orbit.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-GR-22

9. Two satellites of masses m1 and m2 (m1 > m2) are revolving round the earth in

circular orbits of radii r1 and r2 (r1 > r2) respectively. Which of the following

statements is true regarding their speeds v1 and v2 ?

(A) v1 = v2 (B) v1 < v2

(C) v1 > v2 (D) (v1/r1) = (v2/r2).

10. Two satellites are orbiting around the earth in circular orbits of same radius. One

of them is 10 times greater in mass than the other. Their period of revolutions are

in the ratio

(A) 100:1 (B) 1:100

(C) 10:1 (D) 1:1

11. A person brings a mass of 1 kg from infinity to a point A. Initially the mass was at

rest but it moves at a speed of 2 m/s as it reaches A. The work done by a person

on the mass is 3J. The potential at A is:

(A) -3 J/kg (B) -2 J/kg

(C) -5 J/kg (D) none of these.

12. Let V and E be the gravitational potential and gravitational field at a distance r

from the centre of a uniform spherical shell. Consider the following two

statements, (A) The plot of V against r is discontinuous and (B) The plot of E

against r is discontinuous.

(A) Both A and B are correct (B) A is correct but B is wrong

(C) B is correct but A is wrong (D) both A and B are wrong.

13. Two satellites A and B move round the earth in the same orbit. The mass of B is

twice the mass of A. Which of the following is correct?

(A) Speeds of A and B are equal

(B) The potential energy of earth + A is same as that of earth + B

(C) The kinetic energy of A and B are equal

(D) The total energy of earth + A is same as that of earth + B.

14. The minimum speed of a particle projected from earths surface so that it will

never return is/are

GM

(A) (B) 22.1 km/sec

R

(C) 4g0R (D) none of above

planet of mass M and radius R. The speed of the body when it passes the centre

of the planet through a diametrical tunnel is

GM 2GM

(A) (B)

R R

(C) Zero (D) none of these.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-GR-23

16. The energy required to remove a body of mass m from earths surface is/are

equal t

GMm

(A) (B) mgR

R

(C) mgR (D) none of these.

17. A small mass m is moved slowly from the surface of earth to a height h from

the surface. The work done (by external agent) in doing this is

(A) mgh, for all values of h. (B) mgh, for h << R.

1 1

(C) mgR for h = R (D) mgR , for h = R

2 2

18. The escape velocity of a particle of mass m varies as:

(A) m2 (B) m

(C) m0 (D) m-1.

19. Two particles of masses m1 & m2 are infinitely separated and their gravitational

potential energy is chosen zero. Their gravitational energy, when they are

separated by r, is

Gm1m2 Gm1m2

(A) 2

(B)

r r

Gm1m2 Gm1m2

(C) 2

(D)

r r

(mass = M, radius = a) forming at the point, is

GM Gm

(A) cos (B) 1 cos

a a

2GM GM

(C) 2

1 cos (D) 2 1 sin

a a

LEVEL II

field E is applied vertically downwards. If the total potential energy is U (gravitational

plus electrostatic) and height is h (<< radius of earth) (Assume U to be zero on

earths surface) then :

(A) work done by the gravity mgh

(B) work done by electrostatic force qEh

(C) graph potential energy versus height (h) is straight line

(D) graph of potential energy versus height (h) is parabola.

2. A body of mass m is projected vertically upwards with velocity V from earths surface

and attains height h, then

(A) if V = V e (where Ve is escape velocity) then h =

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-GR-24

V2

(B) if V is very small then h

2g

mgR

(C) if h = R, then projection kinetic energy is

2

(D) if h = R then total energy is negative.

space (no gravity). First a mass m is brought from infinity to m

point A and the work done in doing so is W A. Then keeping m

fixed at A, another identical mass m is brought from infinity to

point B. The work done is W B. The work done by the another

identical mass m brought from infinity to C is W C keeping A and

B fixed. Then

B C

(A) W A = 0 (B) W A < W B

(C) WC > W B > W A (D) W A > W B > W C.

earth above the tunnel dug through the earth as shown in the R

figure.

R : Radius of earth.

M : Mass of earth.

(A) Particle will oscillate through the earth to a height R on

both sides C

(B) Particle will execute simple harmonic motion

(C) Motion of the particle is periodic

2GM

(D) Particle passes the centre of earth with a speed =

R

of radius R/3 is made in the sphere as shown.

(A) Gravitational field inside the cavity is uniform.

(B) Gravitational field inside the cavity is nonuniform. R

(C) The escape velocity of a particle projected from point B

88GM R/3

A is .

45R C

(D) Escape velocity is defined for earth and particle system only.

6. Assuming the earth to be a sphere of uniform density the acceleration due to gravity

(A) at a point outside the earth is inversely proportional to the square of its distance from

the centre

(B) at a point outside the earth is inversely proportional to its distance from the centre

(C) at a point inside is zero

(D) at a point inside is proportional to its distance from the centre.

mass M is V.

(A) gravitational potential at the centre of curvature of a thin uniform wire of mass M,

bent into a semicircle of radius R, is also equal to V.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-GR-25

(B) In part (A) if the same wire is bent into a quarter of a circle then also the gravitational

potential at the centre of curvature will be V.

(C) In part (A) if the same wire mass is nonuniformly distributed along its length and it is

bent into a semicircle of radius R, gravitational potential at the centre is V.

(D) none of these

8. In a solid sphere two small symmetrical cavities are created whose centres lie on a

diameter AB of sphere on opposite sides of the centre.

(A) The gravitational field at the centre of the sphere is zero.

(B) The gravitational potential at the centre remains unaffected if cavitiesare not present

(C) A circle at which all points have same potential is in the plane of diameter AB.

(D) A circle at which all points have same potential is in the plane perpendicular to

the diameter AB.

(A) goes round the earth from east to west

(B) can be in the equatorial plane only

(C) can be vertically above any place on the earth

(D) goes round the earth from west to east

(A) its speed is maximum

(B) time period of its rotation is minimum

(C) the total energy of the earth plus satellite system is minimum

(D) the total energy of the earth plus satellitesystem is maximum

COMPREHENSION

I. The escape velocity is the least velocity required by a body to escape away from the

gravitational pull of the earth. In the escaping condition kinetic energy is equal to

potential energy, i.e., total energy of the body is zero. The escape velocity is

independent of angle of projection. Escape velocity depends on the mass of central

body as well as radius of central body. When velocity of orbiting body increases, its

kinetic energy increases and hence total energy.

1. A projectile is fired with a velocity less than escape velocity. Then sum of its kinetic and

potential energy is

(A) negative (B) positive

(C) zero (D) may be positive or zero.

(A) increases (B) decreases

(C) remains unchanged (D) none of these.

3. For the planets orbiting around the sun, the quantity which remains constant is

(A) linear speed (B) kinetic energy

(C) angular speed (D) angular momentum.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-GR-26

potential V are related as

V V V

E i j k

x y z

In the figure, transversal lines represent

x

equipotential surfaces. A particle of mass m is O 10cm 20cm 30cm

released from rest at the origin. The gravitational -30V -40V

-10V -20V

unit of potential, 1V 1cm 2 / s 2

(A) 1 cm/s2 (B) 8 cm/s2

2

(C) 4 cm/s (D) none of these

(A) v 2 y (B) v 2.y

(C) v = 2y (D) v 2y 4y2 2y 2

gram) is released from point O with initial velocity

zero. The work done by gravitational force on the

particle, when it is taken from O to B, is 2 2

(A) 30 m, unit 1V=1cm /s

B

(B) 15 m, unit 90

(C) 30 m, unit

x

(D) + 15 m, unit O 10cm 20cm 30cm

-30V -40V

-10V -20V

I.

Column A Column B

(A) Gravitational potential (p) On the surface of planets with

density ratio 1 : 2

(B) Escape velocity (q) Conservation of angular momentum

(C) Ratio of the acceleration due to (r) Varies with the reference point

gravity 1 : 2

(D) Orbiting satellites (s) Does not depend on the angle

II.

Column A Column B

(A) When v < v0 (p) The path of satellite is hyperbolic

(B) When v = vesc 2 v0 (q) The satellite will strike the earth

(C) When v > vesc (r) The orbit of satellite is elliptical

(D) vesc > v > v0 (s) The path of satellite is parabolic

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-GR-27

LEVEL- I

1. Apply COE

4

2. g = g GR ,

3

Ve = 2gM/R

G M1 m

5. The force exerted on m by M1 = 2

R1 R 2

2

2GM

7. r=

r2

g R2

8. g= 02

r

LEVEL- II

1. Apply COE

6. |m1 v1 + m2 v 2 | = 0 ; K1 + U1 = K2 + U2

7. Each portion of the ring having a mass m attracts the particle towards itself with

G( m)m

a force F given as F =

r2

8. Gravitational force provides necessary centripetal acceleration to keep the stars

in their respective orbits.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-GR-28

LEVEL I

1. 2Gm / a 2. g, 15.84 km/sec

m 1 Gm 1

3. 4. 1

M 2 2 2

4GM1m

5. 6. 10.83 km

(R1 R2 )2

7. 42297 km 8. 0.23 N

9. 84 minute 10. (b) 9.98 km/s

LEVEL II

12GM GM

1. 8.99 103 km/sec 2. ,

25R2 R

GMm

3. r=R 4.

d L d

GM

5.

r

2G 2G 2 GMm

6. m2 , m1 . 7. (Fx)max=

m1 m2 r (m1 m2 )r 3 3 R2

G(m1 m2 ) 2 GM r1r2

8. = 10. m

R3 (r1 r2 )

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-GR-29

LEVEL I

1. B 2. C

3. C 4. C

5. B 6. B

7. C 8. B

9. B 10. D

11. C 12. C

13. A 14. D

15. B 16. B

17. C 18. C

19. D 20. C

LEVEL II

COMPREHENSION

1. (A) 2. (B)

3. (D) 4. (A)

5. (A) 6. (A)

***

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-FM-34

FLUID MECHANICS

6. Assignment (Subjective Problems)

LEVEL I

1. There are three different liquids (liquid 1, liquid 2 and liquid 3) having density

13.6 gm/cc., 1.3 gm/cc and 0.8 gm/cc. Liquid 1 is poured in a uniform U-tube,

which is kept vertical. Liquid 2 & liquid 3 are poured separately into the two arms

till upper surface of liquid 2 & 3 are same. What is the height of liquid 3 if the

height of liquid 2 is 16cm?

2. A very narrow hole exists at a height (H h) from the bottom of a tank, which

contains water upto a height H. Find the distance where stream of water coming

out from the hole will strike the floor.

3. Two cylindrical vessels of radius r = 100m are filled with water upto heights H

and 2H respectively. If the vessels are connected by a narrow tube through two

holes made at their bottom, find the work done by gravity.

sprinkler that consists merely of an enclosure with 24 holes, each 0.050 in. in

diameter. If the water in the hose has a speed of 3.0 ft/sec. at what speed does it

leave the sprinkler holes?

water is added to cover the cube, what fraction of its volume will remain

immersed in mercury? Does the answer depend on the shape of the body?

A a

moves with a horizontal acceleration a as h

shown in the figure. Find the difference in

B

pressure between the points A and B.

7. Find the work done in increasing the radius of a soap bubble from initial radius r1

to final radius r2. Given T = surface tension of soap solution.

8. If n identical water droplets falling under gravity with terminal velocity v coalesce

to form a single drop which has the terminal velocity 4v. Find the number n.

9. A U-tube is partially filled with a liquid. The horizontal part of the tube is 2 m.

The tube is accelerated horizontally with a constant acceleration of 5 m/s2. What

is the difference in the heights of the liquid in the two arms of the U-tube?

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-FM-35

10. If the velocity gradient of water near the surface of a deep river is 6 s1, find the

shearing stress between the horizontal layers of water (coefficient of viscosity of

water = 10 2 poise)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-FM-36

LEVEL II

liquid of relative density 0.82. Find the tension in the string, if relative density of

silver is 10.5.

8 10-3 m. Calculate the diameter of the water stream at a distance 2 10-1 m

below the tap. Assume that water velocity as it leaves the tap is 4 10-1 m/s.

3. There are two identical small holes (cross section area = ) opposite sides of a

tank containing a liquid. (density ) The tank is opened at the top. The difference

is height between the two holes is h. As the liquid comes out of the two holes,

find the net horizontal force. The tank will experience.

A1 and A2 with their bases at the same level A1 A2

each contain a liquid of density . The height

of liquid in the tanks are H1 and H2, H1

respectively. The tanks are joined together H2

through a pipe of cross-sectional area a as

shown in the figure.

(a) Find the time taken to equalize the a

levels in the tanks.

(b) What is the work done by gravity in

equalizing the levels?

20kg

0.5m2 is filled with water. It has an opening at a

height 50 cm from the bottom, having area of

cross-section 1 10-4 m2 . A movable piston of

cross-section area almost equal to 0.5 m2 is fitted

on the top of the tank such that it can slide in the

tank freely. A load of 20 kg is applied on the top

of the water by piston, as shown in the figure.

Find the speed of the water jet with which it hits

the surface when piston is 1m above the bottom

(Ignore the mass of the piston).

6. The vertical arms of U-tube have unequal radius R and r (R > r). If a liquid of

surface tension T and density rests in equilibrium inside the U-tube, find the

level difference h between the meniscuses in the two arms.

7. A small hollow vessel which has a small hole in it is immersed in water to a depth

of 40 cm before water enters into the vessel. Calculate the radius of the hole.

[Surface tension of water = 70 10 3 N/m, density of water = 103 kg/m3]

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-FM-37

water, is placed near the bottom of an incline

10 m x

of angle 300. At height x from bottom a small

hole is made (as shown in figure) such that 30

0

inclined plane normally. Find x.

9. Water flows through a tapering horizontal tube of radii of cross section of the

ends r1 = 20 cm and r2 = 10 cm. The velocity of water at the points for the radius

of cross section r1 is v1 = 1m/sec. Find the force imparted by the emerging water

at the other end of the tube.

10. Two soap bubbles of radii a and b combine under isothermal conditions to form a

single bubble of radius c without any leakage of air. If P o = atmospheric pressure and

4T a 2 b 2 c 2

T = surface tension of soap solution, show that Po =

c 3 a3 b3

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-FM-38

LEVEL - I

1. A and B are two metallic pieces. They are fully immersed in water and then

weighed. Now they show same loss of weight. The conclusion therefore is:

(A) A and B have same weight in air

(B) A and B have equal volumes

(C) The densities of the materials of A and B are the same

(D) A and B are immersed to the same depth inside water.

2. An ice cube contains a large air bubble. The cube is floating on the surface of

water contained on a trough. What will happen to the water level, when the cube

melts?

(A) It will remain unchanged (B) It will fall

(C) It will rise (D) First it will and then rise

3. In a hydraulic lift, used at a service station the radius of the large and small

piston are in the ratio of 20 : 1. What weight placed on the small piston will be

sufficient to lift a car of mass 1500kg?

(A) 3.75Kg (B) 37.5Kg

(C) 7.5Kg (D) 75Kg

4. Water and mercury are filled in two cylindrical vessels upto same height. Both

vessels have a hole in the wall near the bottom. The velocity of water and

mercury coming out of the holes are v1 and v2 respectively. Thus

(A) v1 = v2 (B) v1 = 13.6v2

(C) v1 = v2/13.6 (D) v 1 = (13.6 )v 2

5. An ice cube contains a glass ball. The cube is floating on the surface of water

contained in a trough on the surface of water contained in a trough. What will

happen to the water level, when the cube melts?

(A) It will remain unchanged (B) It will fall

(C) It will rise (D) First it will fall and then rise

made at a depth of 4y from the surface of water in a water tank kept on a

horizontal surface. If equal amount of water comes out of the vessel through the

holes per second then the radius of the circular hole is equal to(r, << y) :

(A) / 2 (B) / 2

(C) / (D) / 2

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-FM-39

tube at the rate of 0.1 m3/sec. The tube is

branched into two semi circular tubes of cross

sectional area A/3 and 2A/3. The velocity of

liquid at Q is (the cross-section of the main tube Q vQ

(A) = 10 -2 m2 and VP = 20 m/sec.):

(A) 5 m/sec (B) 30 m/sec

(C) 35 m/sec (D) None of these.

bottom of a cylindrical water tank and at a depth of h = 2

m from the upper level of water in the tank. The distance,

where the water emerging from the hole strikes the ground

is:

(A) 2 2m (B) 1 m R

(C) 2 m (D) None of these.

9. The excess pressure inside one soap bubble is three time that inside a second

soap bubble. The ratio of the volumes of the two bubbles

(A) 1/9 (B) 9/1

(C) 1/27 (D) 27/1

1750 kg/m3 at the rate of .35 cm/sec. Coefficient of viscosity of the solution is

(Assume mass of the bubble to be negligible)

(A) 9 poise (B) 6 poise

(C) 11 poise (D) 4 poise

A

11. The velocity of the water flowing from the inlet pipe is less

than the velocity of water flowing out from the spin pipe B.

(A) variation of water level in vessel will be irregular. B

(C) the water level will perform periodic oscillation motions.

(D) none of the above.

(A) every particle has its own velocity, different from others.

(B) all particles move with a constant velocity, even if the path is curvilinear.

(C) At a point on the streamline, particle can have two velocities.

(D) At a point on the streamline, particle can have only one velocity along the

tangent.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-FM-40

13. A metallic sphere floats in an immiscible mixture of water ( w = 103 kg/m3) and a

liquid ( L = 13. 5 103 kg/m3) such that 4/5 portion is in water and (1/5)th portion

is in the liquid. The density of the metal in kg/m3 is

(A) 4.5 103 (B) 4.0 103

(C) 3.5 10 3 (D) 3.0 103

14. A stream line body with relative density d1 falls into air from a height h1 on the

surface of a liquid of relative density d2, where d2 is greater than d1. The time of

immersion of the body into the liquid will be

2h1 d1 2h1

(A) (B)

g d2 d1 g

2h1 d1 2h1 d2

(C) (D)

g d2 g d1

15. A tank is filled with water to a height H. Two holes are made on its side wall, one

at a height of h from the bottom and other at a depth h from the top. The

horizontal jets starting from the two holes meet the ground or side (in level with

the bottom of the tank) at the same point. This distance of this point from the

side of the tank is

(A) [4h(H h)] (B) [h(H h)]

16. Which of the following graphs best represents the relation between the height h of

the liquid in a capillary tube and radius of the capillary tube?

h h

(A) (B)

r r

h h

(C) (D)

r r

17. A boat floating in a tank is carrying passengers. If the passengers drink water,

how will it affect the water level of the tank?

(A) It will go down

(B) It will rise

(C) It will remain unchanged

(D)It will depend on atmospheric pressure.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-FM-41

18. A cylinder is filled with non viscous liquid of density d to a height h0 and a hole is

made at a height h1 from the bottom of the cylinder. The velocity of liquid issuing

out of the hole is

(A) (2gh 0 ) (B) 2g(h0 h1 )

(C) ( dgh1 ) (D) (dgh0 )

19. A spherical ball of mass m and radius r is allowed to fall in a medium of viscosity .

The time in which the velocity of the body increases from zero to 0.63 times the

terminal velocity is called time constant ( ). Dimensionally can be represented by

mr 2 6 mr

(A) (B)

6 g2

m

(C) (D) none of these.

6 r

20. A large bottle is fitted with a capillary siphon. Ratio of times taken to empty the bottle

when it is filled with (i) water (ii) petroleum of relative density 0.8.

( water = 0.001poise, water = 0.002 poise, dwater = 1000 kg/m3)

(A) 5/4 (B) 4/5

(C) 2/5 (D) 3/5

LEVEL - II

C

1. A Siphon tube is used to remove liquid from a container as

shown in figure. In order to operate the Siphon tube it must H

A

initially be filled with the liquid.

h

(A) Speed of the liquid through the Siphon is 2g(h y)

B

(B) Pressure at C is Patm g h H y y

(C) Pressure at PA is less then PD D

(D) Pressure at PA equal to PD

2

to a height H. It starts rotating about its axis with constantly

3

H 2H

increasing angular speed. Choose the correct alternatives. 3

(A) at all speeds, shape of the free surface is parabolloid

(B) the free surface touches first the brim of cylinder and then

the base of the cylinder

(C) the free surface cannot touch the base without spilling water

(D) the free surface touches the brim as well as base at the same instant

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-FM-42

3. The vessel shown in the figure has two sections of areas of cross

section A1 and A2. A liquid of density fills both the sections, up to A1

h

a height h in each. Neglect atmospheric pressure

(A) the pressure at the base of the vessel is 2h g A2 X

(B) the force exerted by the liquid on the base of the vessel is h

2h gA2

(C) the weight of the liquid is < 2h gA2

(D) the walls of the vessel at the level X exert a downward force h g (A2 A1) on the

liquid

4. A small body of density is dropped from rest at a height h into a lake of density ,

where > . Which of the following statement or statements is or are correct if all

dissipative effects are neglected? (neglect viscosity)

(A) the speed of the body just entering the lake is 2gh

(B) the body in the lake experiences upward acceleration equal to {( / ) 1} g

(C) the maximum depth to which the body sinks in the lake is h /( )

(D) the body does not come back to the surface of the lake

and filled with a liquid of density 500 gm/cc. Another object of

density 100 gm/cc is dropped onto it, from a height of 45 m from 45m

the upper surface of the liquid. (take g = 10 m/s2)

(A) The second object will collide with the target.

(B) The second object does not collide with the target.

(C) The least separation between object and target is 11.25 m.

20m

(D) The retardation of the object in the liquid is 40 ms2.

6 A closed vessel is half filled with water. There is a hole near the top of the vessel and air

is pumped out from this hole.

(a) The water level will rise up in the level

(b) The pressure at the surface of the water will decrease

(c) The force by the water on the bottom of the vessel will decrease

(d) The density of the liquid will decrease

7 In a streamline flow,

(a) the speed of a particle always remains same

(b) the velocity of a particle always remain same

(c) the kinetic energies of all the particle arriving at a given point are the same

(d) the momenta of all the particles arriving at a given point are the same

8 Water is flowing is streamline motion through a tube with its axis horizontal. Consider

two points A and B in the tube at the same horizontal level.

(a) The pressure at A and B are equal for any shape of the tube

(b) The pressures are never equal

(c) The pressure are equal if the tube has a uniform cross-section

(d) The pressure may be equal if tube has non-uniform cross-section

9 There is a small hole near the bottom of an open tank filled with a liquid. The speed of

the water ejected does not depend upon

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-FM-43

(b) height of the liquid from the hole (d) acceleration due to gravity

10. Water is flowing through a long horizontal tube. Let PA and PB be the pressures at two

points A and B of the tube

(a) PA may be equal to PB

(b) PA may be greater than PB

(c) PA may be smaller than PB

(d) PA = PB only if the cross-sectional area at A and B are equal

COMPREHENSION

consider first a vertical flat surface of height h and width W.

The pressure at a depth y below the liquid surface

P= gy where : density of liquid

dF= ( gy) (Wdy)

= gW y dy

h

F= dF = gW y dy

0

1

= gWh 2

2

h

F = (Wh) g

2

= Projected area pressure at the centroid of the projected area

Projected area can be considered as the image of the surface (flat or curved) on a

screen.

Thus,

FX = Force in X-direction

= Projected area normal to X-direction pressure at the centroid of the projected

area

torque of the hydrostatic force about point O is

2 1

(A) g wh 3 (B) g wh 3

3 3

1

(C) g wh 3 (D) g wh 3

2

2. The line of action of the resultant horizontal force acts at a distance r below point O.

The value of r is

h h

(A) (B)

2 3

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-FM-44

2h h

(C) (D)

3 b

middle as shown in the figure. To the left of the plate is a

liquid of density . To prevent the rotation of the plate, a

force F is applied from the other side at the bottom. The

value of F is

g

(A) Zero (B)

2

g g

(C) (D)

4 6

is filled with two liquids of density 1 = 900 kg m3 and 2 = h

600 kg m3, to a height h = 60 cm each as shown in figure.

A small whole having area a = 5 cm2 is made in right h

vertical wall at a height y = 20 cm from the bottom. A F y

horizontal force F is applied on the tank to keep it in static

equilibrium. The tank is lying on a horizontal surface.

Neglect mass of cylindrical tank comparison to mass of

liquids. (take g = 10 ms-2)

(A) 10 ms1 (B) 20 ms1

(C) 4 ms1 (D) 35 ms1

horizontal plane

(A) 7.2 N (B) 10 N

(C) 15.5 N (D) 20.4 N

6. Minimum and maximum values of F to keep the cylinder in static equilibrium just after

the water starts to spill through the hole. If the co-efficient of static friction between

contact surfaces is 0.01.

(A) 0, 40 N (B) 5.4 N, 52.2 N

(C) 0, 70 N (D) 0, 52.2 N

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-FM-45

mentioned in column b, match columns a and column b.

column I Column II

(A) Youngs modulus of a substance (p) Depends on area of cross-section

(B) Bulk modulus of a substance (q) Depends on the nature of

material

(C) Modulus of rigidity of a substance (r) Depends on temperature

(D) Volume of a substance (s) Depends on length

2. A cube of ice edge 4 cm is placed in an empty cylindrical glass of inner base area 64

cm2. Assume that ice melts uniformly from each side so that it always remains its cubical

shape then edge of the ice cube is x and height of water formed in cylindrical glass is h

at the instant the ice cube just leaves contact with the bottom of the glass.

(density of ice = 0.9 gm/ml, density of water = 1 gm/ml). Then match the following :

Column II

Column I

(A) X (p) 0.9 cm

(B) H (q) 1 cm

(C) Volume of ice melted (r) 56.7 cm3

(D) Volume of water formed (s) 63 cm3

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-FM-46

8. HINTS (Subjective)

LEVEL- I

1 2

2. Hh= gt t = {2(H h)/g}1/2

2

3. Calculate the change of potential energy of the system.

4. Apply continuity equation.

5. v g = (v/4) g = /4

LEVEL- II

1. T = mg Fb = mg V g

1 1

v12 + gh = v 22 (pressure being same)

2 2

3. Force = rate of change of momentum

A1

4. dh2 = dh1 (continuity equation )

A2

The difference in levels decreases by

A1 A 2

dh = dh1 + dh2 = dh1

A2

20 10N

5. Pressure at the top is P1 = P0 +

0.5m2

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-FM-47

LEVEL I

1. 15.4 cm 2. 2 (H h) / h

3. 19.24 J 4. 29 ft/sec.

5. 0.19, NO 6. PB PA = h g = a

7. 8 T(r 22 r 12 ) 8. 8

9. 1 m. 10. 10 3 N/m2

LEVEL II

1. 29.04 N

2. 3.54 10-3 m

3. 2 gh

A1A 2 2(H1 H2 ) 1

4. (a) (b) gA1A 2 (H1 H2 )2

a( A1 A 2 ) g 2

5. 4.56 m/s

2T 1 1

6.

g r R

7. 3.6 10 5 m

8. 8.33 m.

9. 502.65 N.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-PII-FM-48

LEVEL I

1. B 2. A

3. A 4. A

5. B 6. C

7. D 8. D

9 C 10. A

11. C 12. D

13. C 14. A

15. A 16. C

17. D 18. D

19. C 20. C

LEVEL II

3. (A), (B), (C), (D) 4. (B), (C)

5. (B), (C), (D) 6. (B), (C)

7. (C), (D) 8. (C)

9. (A), (B) 10. (A), (B), (C), (D)

COMPREHENSION

1. (B) 2. (C)

3. (D) 4. (C)

5. (A) 6. (D)

1. (A) (q), (r); (B) (q), (r); (C) (q), (r); (D) (p), (r), (s)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-SHM-29

14. Assignment (Subjective Problems)

LEVEL I

where x is in cm, and t is in seconds. Find the resultant amplitude.

along x-axis with frequency 60 Hz, initially the particle starts from x = +5 cm. Find

(a) equation of motion of the particle.

(b) the initial phase, amplitude and time period of the particle.

(c) velocity- displacement and acceleration displacement curve of this motion.

(d) plot the graphs of (i) KE vs displacement

(ii) PE vs displacement

(iii) Total energy vs displacement

3. A cubical body (side .1 m and mass 0. 02 kg) floats in water. It is pressed and

then released so that it oscillates vertically. Find the time period. (density of

water = 1000 kg/m3).

m

4. Find the time period of the motion of a particle shown

in figure. Neglecting the small effect of the bend near 10 cm

0

45 60

0

the bottom.

2m 3m

the blocks are displaced slightly in opposite directions

and released, they will execute S.H.M. calculate the

time period.

6. A uniform rod of mass m and length is pivoted at one end. It is free to rotate in

a vertical plane. Find the time period of oscillation of rod if it is slightly displaced

from vertical and released.

7. A particle is executing SHM. A and B are the two points at which its velocity is

zero. It passes through a certain point P at intervals of 0.5 and 1.5 sec with a

speed of 3 m /s. Determine the maximum speed and also the ratio AP/PB.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-SHM-30

Q

8. A ball is suspended by a thread of length L at the point O

on the wall PQ which is inclined to the vertical by a small O

through a small angle away from the vertical and also

from the wall if the ball is released, find the period of C

P

oscillation of the pendulum when B

(a) <

(b) > . Assume the collision on the wall to be perfectly elastic.

M

9. A small solid cylinder of mass M attached to a horizontal k

R

massless spring can roll without slipping along a

horizontal surface. Show that if the cylinder is displaced

and released, if executes S.H.M. Also find its time

period.

figure is and the horizontal plane is smooth (a) If the k

m

system is slightly displaced and released find the

M

magnitude of the frictional force between the blocks when

the displacement from the mean position is x. (b) what

can be the maximum amplitude if the upper block does not

slip relative to the lower block ?

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-SHM-31

LEVEL II

mercury of mass m = 200g poured into a x

= 300 with the vertical. The cross-sectional x

area of the tube S = 0.50 cm2. The viscosity

of mercury is to be neglected.

two springs of stiffness k1 and k2

k1

as shown in the figure. Find the

angular frequency of the system

for small oscillation. Disc can roll

on the surface without slipping.

l l

3. A uniform bar with mass m lies symmetrically

across two rapidly rotating fixed rollers, A and B

A B

with distance ' ' between the bars centre of mass

mg

and each roller. The rollers whose direction of

rotation are shown in figure slip against the bar

with coefficient of friction . Suppose the bar is

displaced horizontally by a small distance 'x' and

then released, find the time period of oscillation.

support by spring of stiffness k. A small sphere of mass m is rigidly attached at

the bottom of the rod. The rod is partially immersed in a liquid of density . Find

the period of small oscillations.

immiscible liquids of densities 1 and 2. Its bottom end is at the interface of the

liquids. Find the period of small oscillation.

small oscillation of block m in the k1

m

arrangement shown. Rod is

k2

massless. [Assume gravity to be

absent]

k3 l/2 l/2

passing through centre and perpendicular to the plane. A r

k m

particle of mass m = 0.1 kg which can slide without friction,

initially at the centre of the disc and spring in its natural length.

Find the period of the particle is is (a)10 rad/hr (b) 6 rad/hr

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-SHM-32

fixed points A and B on a smooth horizontal table such that AB = 3 . A mass m is

attached to the mid point of the string and makes a small oscillation in a

horizontal line perpendicular to AB. Find the frequency of oscillation of m.

k

angle and a block A of mass m are connected

together with a massless spring of spring constant k, m

as shown in the figure. The system is kept on a

frictionless horizontal plane. If the block is displaced M

frequency of small oscillations.

small oscillations of the system

shown. The T - structure is b

massless. The springs are initially

relaxed. a a

k k

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-SHM-33

LEVEL I

motion of the particle is

(A) on a straight line (B) on an ellipse

(C) periodic (D) simple harmonic

2. Which of the following quantities are always positive in a simple harmonic motion?

(A) F. a (B) v. r

(C) a. r (D) F. r

motion is

2 2

2A A

(A) (B)

2

2

A

(C) (D) Zero

2

4. A small block oscillates back and forth on a smooth concave surface of radius R.

The time period of small oscillation is

R 2R

(A) T = 2 (B) T = 2

g g

R

(C) T = 2 (D) None of these

2g

frequency of oscillations in Hz is

5

(A) 5 Hz (B) Hz

10

(C) Hz (D) none of these.

3

amplitude and phase are superimposed

(A) the resulting motion is uniform circular motion.

(B) the resulting motion is a linear simple harmonic motion along a straight line

inclined equally to the straight lines of motion of component ones.

(C) the resulting motion is an elliptical motion, symmetrical about the lines of

motion of the components.

(D) the two S.H.M. will cancel each other.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-SHM-34

shown in the figure is

K 2K K = spring constant

(A) (B)

2m m Massless

K 4K smooth

(C) (D) pulley

4m m

m

8. A particle executes SHM with a frequency f. The frequency with which it's KE

oscillates is

(A) f/2 (B) f

(C) 2f (D) 4f

9. A simple pendulum has some time period T. What will be the percentage

change in its time period if its amplitudes is decreased by 5 % ?

(A) 6 % (B) 3 %

(C) 1.5 % (D) 0 %

10. The work done by the string of a simple pendulum during one complete

oscillation is equal to

(A) total energy of the pendulum (B) KE of the pendulum

(C) PE of the pendulum (D) Zero

shown in the figure. Each rod is of mass M and length l. If this A B

combination is hinged at A and kept in vertical plane then time

period of small oscillations about A is equal to

l 3l l

(A) 2 (B) 2

6 3g 2 2g

l 11l C

(C) 2 (D) 2

2g (6 5 )(g )

h

2. A cylindrical piston of mass M slides smoothly M

inside a long cylinder closed at one end, enclosing P A

a certain mass of a gas.

The cylinder is kept with its axis horizontal. If the piston is slightly compressed

isothermally from its equilibrium position, it oscillates simple harmonically, the

period of oscillation will be

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-SHM-35

Mh MA

(A) T = 2 (B) T = 2

PA Ph

M

(C) T = 2 (D) T = 2 MPhA

PAh

mass M1 is pulled down a little and force constant of the spring is

k and masses of the fixed pulleys are negligible, is

M2

M1 M2 M1 4M2

(A) T = 2 (B) T = 2

k k M1

k

M2 4M1 M2 3M1

(C) T = 2 (D) T = 2

k k

suspension O moves a with a constant acceleration = 1 i + 2 j with respect

to earth is

(A) T = 2 2 2 1/ 2

(B) T = 2 2 2 1/ 2

{(g 2) 1} {( g 1) 2}

(C) T = 2 (D) T = 2

g {g2 2 1/ 2

1}

5. A particle moves along the X-axis according to the equation x = 10 sin 3( t).

The amplitudes and frequencies of component SHMs are

(A) amplitude 30/4, 10/4 ; frequencies 3/2, 1/2

(B) amplitude 30/4, 10/4 ; frequencies 1/2, 3/2

(C) amplitude 10, 10 ; frequencies 1/2, 1/2

(D) amplitude 30/4, 10 ; frequencies 3/2, 2

of m lying on a frictionless surface attached to a spring

of force constant k. Pendulum is slightly displaced and k

m

released. Time period of oscillation of the system is m

m m

(A) 2 (B)

g k g k

m

(C) 2 (D) 2

g k

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-SHM-36

shown figure. Point mass m is slightly displaced to compress A

and released. Time period of oscillation C 90 B

m m m

(A) 2 (B) 2

2k 3k

A

m m

(C) 2 (D) 2

k k 2 k 1

springs of force constant k. Initially springs are A B

relaxed. Mass A is displaced to left and B is displaced

towards right by same amount and released then time

period of oscillation of any one block (Assume

collision to be perfectly elastic)

m m

(A) 2 (B) 2

k 2k

m m

(C) (B)

k 2k

force just as particle passing through mean position, percentage change in

amplitude will be

(A) 1% (B) 2%

(C) 0.5% (D) zero.

frequency is f. If one spring is removed, frequency S2

M S1

will be

(A) f (B) 2f

(C) 2 f (D) f 2

LEVEL II

1. Equation of SHM is x = 10 sin 10 t. Find the distance between the two points

where speed is 50 cm/sec. x is in cm and t is in seconds.

(A) Zero (B) 20 cm

(C) 17.32 cm (D) 8.66 cm.

vertical line between angular limits and + . For an angular displacement

(| | < ) the tension in the string and velocity of the bob are T and v respectively.

The following relations hold good under the above condition.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-SHM-37

(A) T cos = Mg

Mv 2

(B) T + Mg cos =

L

(C) The magnitude of tangential acceleration of he bob | aT | = g sin

(D) T = Mg (3 cos 2 cos )

motion of angular frequency . The amplitude of oscillation is gradually increased. The

coin will leave contact with the platform for the first time

(A) at the highest position of the platform (B) at the mean position of the platform

(C) for an amplitude of g/ 2 (D) for an amplitude of g /

r (1 2 cos 2 t)i (3 sin2 t) j (3t)k

in the ground frame. All units are in SI. Choose the correct statement (s) :

3

(A) The particle executes SHM in the ground frame about the mean position 1, ,3t .

2

(B) The particle executes SHM in a frame moving along the zaxis with a velocity of

3 m/s.

5

(C) The amplitude of the SHM of the particle is m .

2

4 3

(D) The direction of the SHM of the particle is given by the vector i j .

5 5

5. Which of the following will have a different time period, if taken to the moon ?

(A) A simple pendulum.

(B) A spring mass system oscillating vertically in the gravitational field.

(C) A torsion pendulum.

(D) An hourglass clock, which is essentially a vessel filled with a liquid, emptying

through a hole in the bottom.

(A) A simple harmonic motion is necessarily periodic.

(B) A simple harmonic motion is necessarily oscillatory

(C) Oscillation motion may be periodic

(D) A periodic motion is necessarily oscillatory

2. Which of the following is/are essential for simple harmonic motion?

(A) Inertia (B) Restoring force

(C) Material Medium (D) gravity

3. Which of the following is/are the characteristics(s) of SHM?

(A) projection of uniform circular motion on any straight line

(B) periodic nature

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-SHM-38

(D) acceleration is zero at the mean position

5. Which of the following will change their time period if they are taken to moon ?

(A) a simple pendulum (B) a physical pendulum

(C) a torsional pendulum (D) a spring pendulum

6. Which of the following statements are true for the oscillations of the mass suspended

with a spring?

(A) Time period varies directly as the square root of the suspended mass.

(B) A stiffer spring gives lesser time period

(C) The mass can execute oscillations in the state of weightlessness

(D) The system will have the same time period both on the moon and earth

COMPREHENSION

shape, capable of oscillating about a horizontal axis

passing through it. For small oscillations the motion of a

physical pendulum is almost as easy as for a simple l CM

pendulum. Figure shows a rigid body pivoted about point L

P and displaced from equilibrium through an angle . CM

The gravitational force provides a restoring torque of

magnitude mgl sin about point P and time period is

given by

I M

T 2 Stick

mgl

1. The period of oscillation for small angular displacement of a stick of length L pivoted

about an ends is

L 2L

(A) 2 (B) 2

2g 3g

L 3L

(C) 2 (D) 2

6g 4g

2. If the stick is pivoted about a point P, distance x from the center of mass, the period of

oscillation is

L2 12x2 3L2 2x 2

(A) 2 (B) 2

12 gx 2gx

12L2 x2 2L2 3x2

(C) 2 (D) 2

12gx 2gx

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-SHM-39

L 2

(A) (B) L

12 3

L 2L

(C) (D)

3 3

II. If a mass attached to a spring (massless) is pulled down twice as far, the force will be

twice as much, the resulting acceleration is twice as great, the velocity it acquires in a

given time is twice as great, the distance covered in a given time is twice as great, but it

has to cover twice as great a distance in order to get back to the origin. In a linear

equation the time pattern does not change. If there were no friction the oscillation stays

on with same amplitude. However when there exists a friction of magnitude smaller for

small oscillation and larger for larger oscillation the amplitude gets dropped by the same

fraction in every cycle.

4. When the displacement from the mean position is doubled, the quantity that will vary will

be

(A) time period only (B) velocity only

(C) acceleration only (D) both (B) and (C).

maximum amplitude A0 oscillating in a damping media, the amplitude just after n

oscillations will be

a a

(A) A 0 (B) A 0 a A 0

n n

(C) A0 a (n 1) (D) A0 an.

6. To solve the S.H. equation with friction, one must consider each half cycle separately

since.

(A) friction reverses its direction in each cycle

(B) the S.H. equation will not be linear

(C) friction is independent of the displacement

(D) all of these.

Column A Column B

(A) A body is moving along a straight (p) This will may be a uniform linear

line and accelerating uniformly motion

(B) A body is moving along a straight (q) This will be a non-uniform linear

line. It covers a distance 72 m motion.

during the first six seconds of its

motion and another 72 m during

the next six seconds

(C) A body is thrown vertically upward. (r) During the motion, linear

It rises to some height and then momentum is not conserved.

falls down along the same line.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-SHM-40

(D) A bullet is fired into air from a gun. (s) Position-time graph of the motion

will may be a straight line that is

parallel neither to x-axis nor the y-

axis.

F = (8 2x) N.

Particle is released from x = 7 m

For the subsequent motion match the following (all values in Column II are in S.I. units)

Column II

Column I

(A) Amplitude of SHM is (p) 0.5

(B) Time taken to move from x = 2.5 m to (q) 3

x = 4 m (approx)

(C) Total energy of SHM system (r) 6

(D) Velocity of particle at x = 4m (s) 9

surface under the action of an external variable II

force. I

The external force (fext) is plotted against x

position (x) from mean position on shown in III

graph.

Match which graph is possible for different

IV

motions.

Column II

Column I (Nature of graph)

x = position

v = velocity of particle

(A) x positive, v positive (p) I

(B) x positive, v negative (q) II

(C) x negative, v positive (r) III

(D) x negative, v negative (s) IV

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-SHM-41

LEVEL- I

3. F = -A gx

6. When the rod is rotated through an angle about O, the restoring torque about

the suspension point is 0 = mg( /2) .

g

motion is given by = 0 sin t, where =

L

kx

a = - 2x = M m

LEVEL- II

= x + xcos = x (1+cos )

2. Total energy = Kpot + Ktran + U

3. The net horizontal force acting on the rod is given as f1 and f2 will not be equal

F = f1 f2 = (N1 N2)

4. When the block is pushed in by a distance x in the liquid, the net force acting on

the M and m system is

F = LA g + mg kx A(h0 + x) g

5. Initially the cylinder is just touching the liquid of density 2. When the cylinder is

dipped by a distance x1 further,

F = mg x1 A 2 g - 1 A 1 g

Stress

8. Y=

Strain

9. Apply COE & COM.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-SHM-42

LEVEL I

1. 10 cm.

1

2. (a) x = 10 sin (120 t + /6) (b) /6, 10 cm, sec.

60

6m 2

5. 2 6. 2

5k 3g

2 1

7. 3 2 m/sec ;

2 1

L L 1

8. (a) T1 = 2 (b) [ 2 sin / ]

g g

3M mkx m(M m)

9. 2 10. (a) (b)

2k m M Mk

LEVEL II

2(k1 4k 2 )

1. 0.8 sec 2.

3m

m L A

3. 2 4. T2

g k A g

4k 1k 3 k 1k 2 4k 2k 3

5. 6.

g

1 2 g 4k 3 k 2 m

2Y

7. (a) 0.785 sec (b) no oscillation. 8.

3m

k mM

9. 2 2

where mred =

mred cos m sin m M

2ka 2 g

10.

mb 2 b

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-SHM-43

LEVEL I

1. (A) 2. (A)

3. (A) 4. (A)

5. (B) 6. (B)

7. (C) 8. (C)

9. (D) 10. (D)

11. (D) 12. (A)

13. (C) 14. (A)

15. (B) 16. (B)

17. (A) 18. (C)

19. (C) 20. (C)

LEVEL II

3. (A), (C) 4. (B), (C), (D)

5. (A), (D) 6. (A), (B), (C)

7. (A), (B) 8. (B), (C), (D)

9. (A), (B) 10. (A) (B), (C), (D)

COMPREHENSION

1. (B) 2. (A)

3. (A) 4. (D)

5. (D) 6. (D)

1. (A) (q), (r); (B) (p), (s); (C) (q), (r); (D) (q), (r)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-E&W-46

11. Assignment (Subjective Problems)

LEVEL I

1. If a wave form has the equation y1 = A1 sin ( t - kx) & y2 = A2 cos ( t - kx),

find the equation of the resulting wave on superposition.

2. A wave train has the equation y = 4 sin (30 t + 0.1x) where x is in cm and t in

seconds. What is the frequency of the source? How much time does a wave

pulse take to reach a point 30 cm from it?

3. When the stretching force of a wire in increased by 25 kg-wt, the frequency of the

note emitted is changed in the ratio 2/3. Calculate the original stretching force.

4. A policeman on duty detects a drop of 10% in the pitch of the horn of a moving

car as it crosses him. If the velocity of sound is 330 meters per second, calculate

the speed of the car.

5. A steel wire fixed at both ends has a fundamental frequency of 200 Hz. A person

can hear sound of maximum frequency 15 KHz. What is the highest harmonic

that can be played on this string which is audible to the person?

6. A wire of length L is fixed at both ends such that F is tension in it. Its mass per

unit length is given from one end to other end as = ox where o is constant.

Find time taken by a transverse pulse to move from lighter end to its mid point.

y(x, t) = 0.06 sin 2 x cos 120 t where x, y are in meters

and t is in seconds. The length of the string is 1.5 m & its mass m = 3 10-2 kg.

Find the

(a)wavelength (b) frequency. (c) amplitude of the component of waves.

(d) maximum velocity of the particle. (e) amplitude at a distance x = 0.375 m.

The 5th harmonic (=2nd overtone) of A resonates with nth harmonic of B. Find n.

y = A cos(ax+bt) (M.K.S. system)

where A, and b are positive constant.

(a) What is the wave length and frequency of the incident wave?

(b) Find the wave speed and maximum particle speed.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-E&W-47

10. The intensity of sound from a point source is 1.0 x 10 -8 W/m2 at a distance of 5.0

m from the source. What will be the intensity at a distance of 25 m from the

source?

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-E&W-48

LEVEL II

circle of radius R.

(i) Find the tension in the rope if the linear mass density of the rope is .

(ii) A kink develops in the whirling rope. Under what condition does the kink

remain stationary relative to an observer on the ground?

2. AB is cylinder of length 1.0 m, fitted with a flexible diaphragm C at the middle and

two thin flexible diaphragms A and B at the ends. The portions AC and BC contain

hydrogen and oxygen respectively. The diaphragms A and B are set into vibration

of the same frequency. What is the minimum frequency of these vibrations for

which the diaphragm C is a node? Under the conditions of the experiment, the

velocity of sound in hydrogen is 1100 m/s and in oxygen is 300 m/s.

3. A long tube contains air at a pressure of P and temperature T. The tube is open

at one end and closed at the other end by a movable piston. A tuning fork near the

open end is vibrating with a frequency f. Resonance is produced when the piston is

at distance L1 and L2 from the open end. Mean molecular mass of the air is M.

(a) Find the speed of sound in air.

(b) Find the adiabatic constant of the air.

4. A piston is fitted in a cylindrical tube of small cross section with the other end of

the tube open. The tube resonates with a tuning fork of frequency 512 Hz. The

piston is gradually pulled out of the tube and it is found that a second resonance

occurs when the piston is pulled out through a distance of 32.0 cm. Calculate the

speed of sound in the air of the tube.

5. Three tuning forks with unknown frequencies f 1, f2 and f3 are vibrated. 5 beats per

second are heard when f1 and f2 are vibrated, 6 beats per second for f1 and f 3,

while 7 beats per second for f2 and f3. If f2 is loaded with wax, number of beats for

f2 and f3 decreases while for f1 and f2 increases.

Find tuning forks having maximum frequency and minimum frequency in terms of f2.

Youngs constant y1 and y2 are joined and suspended from

1

a fixed support. A block of mass M is attached to the lowest

point C. The density of the rods is negligibly small. Find B

displacement of the point C.

2

C

M

7. A string vibrates according to the equation y = 5 sin ( x/3) cos (40 t) where x and

y are in cm and t is in second.

(a) What are the amplitude and velocity of the component waves whose

superposition can give rise to this vibration?

(b) What is the distance between two successive nodes?

(c) What is the velocity of a particle of the string at position x = 1.5 cm and

t = 9/8 second?

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-E&W-49

8. How long will it take sound waves to travel distance between the points A and B

if the air temperature between them varies linearly from T1 to T2? The velocity of

sound propagation in air is equal v = T , where is a constant.

9. The first overtone of an open organ pipe beats with the first overtone of a closed

organ pipe with a beat frequency of 2.2 Hz. The fundamental frequency of the

closed organ pipe is 110 Hz. Find the lengths of the pipes.

10. A whistle emitting a sound of frequency 440 Hz is tied to a string of 1.5 m length

and rotated with an angular velocity of 20 rad/s in the horizontal plane. Calculate

the range of frequencies heard by an observer stationed at a large distance from

the whistle.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-E&W-50

LEVEL I

y2 = A sin ( t kx + ) is

(A) 2A cos (B) 2A tan ( /2)

(C) A cos sin (D) none

2. A sine wave has an amplitude A and wavelength . The ratio of particle velocity

and the wave velocity is equal to (2 A = )

(A) 1 (B) = 1

(C) 1 (D) data insufficient.

3. The equation of a wave pulse moving with a speed 1 m/sec at time t = 0 is given

1

as y = f(x) = . Its equation at time t = 1 second can be given as

1 x2

1 1

(A) y = 2

(B) y =

1 (1 x ) 1 (1 x )2

1 1

(C) y = 2

(D) y =

1 (x 1) 1

1

1 x2

4. The velocity of a transverse wave in a string does not depend on

(A) tension (B) density of material of string

(C) radius of string (D) length of string

maximum velocity of any particle in air is equal to

(A) 2.5 m/s (B) 5 m/s

(C) 3.30 / m/sec (D) none of these

6. In a resonance column experiment, the first resonance is obtained when the level

of the water in tube is 20 cm from the open end. Resonance will also be obtained

when the water level is at a distance of

(A) 40 cm from the open end. (B) 60 cm from the open end.

(C) 80 cm from the open end. (D) data insufficient.

7. A wire of length having tension T and radius r vibrates with natural frequency f.

Another wire of same metal with length 2 having tension 2T and radius 2r will

vibrate with natural frequency

(A) f (B) 2f

f

(C) 2 2f (D)

2 2

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-E&W-51

8. Under the same conditions of pressure and temperature, the velocity of sound in

oxygen and hydrogen gases are v0 and vH, then

(A) vH= vo (B) vH = 4vo

(C) vo = 4 VH (D) vH = 16 vo

wave velocity 300 m/s. Two particles of a medium, separated by 1.5 m, vibrate

being affected by the wave

(A) in phase (B) in opposite phase.

(C) 45 out of phase. (D) none of these

10. At t=0 source starts falling under gravity and a detector is projected S

upwards with a velocity 10 m/s. For the vertical upward motion of

detector

(A) apparent frequency received by detector = source frequency.

(B) initially apparent frequency > source frequency and finally less 5m

(C) apparent frequency depends only on the detector velocity. D

(D) date insufficient.

11. A string is clamped on both ends. Which of the following wave equations is valid

for a stationary wave set up on this string? (Origin is at one end of string.)

(A) y = A sin kx. sin t (B) y = A cos kx sin t

(C) y = A cos kx. cos t (D) None of the above.

set up at the bottom. The velocity v of the pulse related to the

distance covered by it is given as

(A) v x (B) v x

(C) v 1/x (D) none of these x

13. The third overtone of a closed organ pipe is equal to the second harmonic of an

open organ pipe. Then the ratio of their lengths is equal to

(A) 7/4 (B) 3/5

(C) 3/2 (D) none of these

(A) solid only (B) liquid only

(C) gases only (D) all of the above

15. If the temperature of the medium drops by 1 %, the velocity of sound in that

medium

(A) increases by 5 % (B) remains unchanged

(C) decreases by 0.5 % (D) decreases by 2 %

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-E&W-52

16. The velocity of sound through a diatomic gaseous medium of molecular weight M

at 0C is approximately.

R 3R

(A) (B)

M M

382 R 273 R

(C) (D)

M M

1 1

given by y = 2

at time t = 0 and by y = at time t = 2 seconds

(1 x ) 1 ( x 2)2

where x and y are in meters. The shape of the wave disturbance does not

change during the propagation. The velocity of the wave is

(A) 0.5 m/s (B) 1 m/sec

(C) 2 m/s (D) 1.5 m/sec

is in meters and t is in seconds. The expression represents

(A) A wave travelling in positive x-direction with a velocity 1.5 m/s.

(B) A wave travelling in negative x-direction with a velocity 1.5 m/s.

(C) A wave travelling in the negative x-direction having a wavelength 2 m.

(D) A wave travelling in positive x-direction having a wavelength 2 m.

19. A transverse wave is given by A sin( t x) where and are constants. The

ratio of wave velocity to maximum particle velocity is

(A) A (B) 1/ A

(C) 1 (D) none of the above.

massless thread Y and A represent Youngs modulus

and cross sectional area of wire respectively. The strain

developed in the thread is m

m

mg 1 sin mg

(A) (B)

2 yA yA

mg sin 2mg

(C) (D)

yA yA

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-E&W-53

LEVEL II

(A) Must be longitudinal (B) May be longitudinal

(C) Must be transverse (D) May be transverse

2. A wave is represented by the equation

y = (0.001 mm) sin [(50 s 1)t + (2.0 m 1)x]

(A) The wave velocity = 100 m/s (B) The wavelength = 2.0 m

(C) The frequency = 25/ Hz (D) The amplitude = 0.001 mm

3. An electrically maintained tuning fork vibrates with constant frequency and constant

amplitudes. If the temperature of the surrounding air increases but pressure remains

constant, the sound produced will have

(A) Larger wavelength (B) Larger frequency

(C) Larger velocity (D) Larger time period

4. The fundamental frequency of a vibrating organ pipe is 200 Hz.

(A) The first overtone is 400 Hz (B) The first overtone may be 400

Hz

(C) The first over tone may be 600 Hz (D) 600 Hz is an overtone

5. A listener is at rest with respect to the source of sound. A wind starts blowing along the

line joining the source and the observer. Which of the following quantities do not

change?

(A) Frequency (B) Velocity of sound

(C) Wavelength (D) Time period

6. The figures represent two snaps of a travelling wave on a string of mass per unit length,

1

= 0.25 kg/m. The two snaps are taken at time t = 0 and at t s. Then

24

(A) speed of wave is 4 m/s

(B) the tension in the string is 4 N

(C) the equation of the wave is y = 10 sin ( x 4 t )

6

(D) the maximum velocity of the particle m/s

25

y(mm) y(mm)

10 10

5 5

5 x(m) 5 1 x(m)

10 10 1

t=0 t=24 s

Figure I Figure II

7. As a wave propagates,

(A) the wave intensity remains constant for a plane wave

(B) the wave intensity decrease as the inverse of the distance from the source for a

spherical wave

(C) the wave intensity decreases as the inverse square of the distance from the

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-E&W-54

(D) total intensity of the spherical wave over the spherical surface remains constant

at all times, while source is at the centre of spherical surface.

8. A source is moving across a circle given by the equation x 2+y2 = R2, with constant speed

330

v m/s, in anti-clockwise sense. A detector is at rest at point (2R, 0) w.r.t. the

6 3

centre of the circle. If the frequency emitted by the source is f and the speed of sound,

C = 330 m/s. Then

(A) the position of the source when the detector

3 R

records the maximum frequency R,

2 2

(B) the co-ordinate of the source when the detector records minimum frequency is (0,

R)

6 3

(C) the maximum frequency recorded by the detector is f

6 3

6 3

(D) the minimum frequency recorded by the detector is f

6 3

1

y (1mm) sin 50 s t (2.0m 1 )x + (1mm) cos 50 s 1

t (2.0m 1 )x

(A) The wavevelocity is zero, since it is a standing wave.

3

(B) A node is formed at x m.

8

(C) The amplitude of the oscillation at the antinode is 2 mm.

(D) Energy transfer occurs along the positive xaxis.

means of two identical copper wires of the same

length as the rod as shown in the figure. Particles of

masses 1 kg and 4 kg are then attached to the ends A

and B of the rod. The ratio of the fundamental

A B

frequencies of vibration of the wires AP and BP, i.e.,

fA

=

fB

1

(A) 4 (B)

2

(C) 16 (D) 2.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-E&W-55

COMPREHENSION

shown in the figure. Two small holes S and D are made in the

tube at the positions right angle to each other. A source R

placed at S generates a wave of intensity I0 which is equally S

divided into two parts: one part travels along the longer path,

while the other travels along the shorter path. Both the part

waves meet at the point D where a detector is placed.

D

produced is given by

R

(A) R (B)

2

R

(C) (D) all of these

4

2. If a minima is formed at the detector then, the magnitude of wavelength of the wave

produced is given by

3

(A) 2 R (B) R

2

2

(C) R (D) None of these

5

(A) 4I0 (B) 2I0

(C) I0 (D) 3I0

and tension. Two strings of equal lengths are v 1 2

joined at B. Mass of string BC is four times mass B

C

of string AB. If a wave pulse is generated in string A

AB, which travels towards boundary at B with x=0 x=L x=2L

speed v. Equation of incident pulse is given as

yi A i sin( t kx)

Based on above information, answer the following

questions.

Ai 2Ai

(A) (B)

3 3

Ai 2A i

(C) (D) .

3 3

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-E&W-56

v

(A) v (B)

2

(C) 2v (D) None of these.

Ai Ai

yr sin( t kx) yr sin( t kx)

(A) 3 (B) 3

2A i 2Ai

yt sin( t 2kx) yt sin( t 2kx)

3 3

Ai Ai

yr sin( t kx) yr sin( t kx)

(C) 3 (D) 3 .

2Ai 2A i k

yt sin( t 2kx) yt sin( t x)

3 3 2

transverse wave passes through it. Three particles A, B

and C of the string are also shown. Match the physical C

quantities in the left column with the description in the

column on the right.

Column A Column B

(A) Velocity of A (p) Downwards, if the wave is travelling towards right.

(B) Acceleration of A (q) Downwards, if the wave is travelling towards left.

(C) Velocity of B (r) Downwards, no matter which way the wave is

travelling.

(D) Velocity of C (s) Zero.

radius 3 m with angular velocity of 10 rad s1. A

sound detector located for away is executing linear M

A B C D

SHM with amplitude 6 m on line BCD as shown. The

5 P

frequency of detector for oscillation is per

0. Source emits a continuous sound wave of

frequency 340 Hz. (velocity of sound = 330 ms1).

Match the column A with B.

Column A Column B

(A) The frequency of sound recorded by (p) 255 H.

detector at t = 3T/4.

(B) The frequency of sound recorded by (q) 1 : 1.

detector at t = T/4.

(C) The ratio of the time period of source (r) 442 Hz.

and detector (circular motion and

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-E&W-57

SHM).

(D) Maximum velocity of (s) 2 : 1.

detector/maximum velocity of source.

(T is time period of oscillation).

stretched strings. In each case, the string is oscillating in a particular mode, and, its shape

and other characteristics are shown at time t = 0. The maximum amplitude (in all the

cases) is A, the velocity of the waveform on the string is e, the mass per unit length of the

string is and the frequency of vibration is f (angular frequency = ).

The kinetic energy of the string (of length L) is represented by the functions in Column

II. Match the correct entries in Column II.

Column II

Column I

(A) Fixed Fixed (p) 2

end end

9 c2 2

A

A 4 L

L

(B) Fixed Free (q) 2

end

9 c2 2 2

end A sin t

A 4 L

L

(C) Free (r)

end

Free 9 2 c2 2 2

end A sin t

16 L

A

A

L

(D) (s) 2

c2 2 2

A A sin t

4 L

L

Travelling wave

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-E&W-58

LEVEL- I

Ar = A12 A 22

y = A sin ( t + kx)

T T 2 .5

3. f1 = , f2 =

1 T

8. f1 =

2L m

P T

f2 = ; P = number of loops.

2L m

LEVEL- II

2

1. y = 2a sin x cos t

(2n 1)v

2. f= n = 1, 2, 3 . . .. . for Ist, 2nd, 3rd . . .. . .overtone.

4

v2

2T sin = (dm)

R

v1 v

4. y = A cos (ax + bt) 5. n1 = , n2 = 2

4 4

v RT

6. (a) L2 L1 = (b) v =

2f M

8. P = I1A1 = I2 A2 = I1 (4 r12 ) = I2 (4 r22 )

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-E&W-59

LEVEL I

1

1. A12 A 22 sin { t kx + tan-1 (A2/A1)}. 2. (a) 15 Hz. (b) sec.

10

1 o 32

5. 75 6. L

3 2 F

7. (a)1 m (b) 60 Hz (c) 0.03 m (d) 7.2 m/s (e) 4.2 cm.

8. 7

2

9. (a) = (b) f = b/2 (b) b/a, Ab

a

10

10. 4 10 W/m2.

LEVEL II

4f 2M(| L 2 L1 |) 2

1. (a) 2f(L2 L1) (b) 2. f1 = f2 + 5, f3 = f2 7

RT

Mg 1 2

3. 4. 327.68 m/s.

A y1 y2

Mg 1 2

5. f1 = f2 + 5, f3 = f2 7 6.

A y1 y2

2

7. (a) 5/2 cm, 120 cm/s (b) 3 cm (c) Zero 8.

T1 T2

9. 1 = 0.993 m or 1.006 m

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-E&W-60

LEVEL I

1. (D) 2. (A)

3. (B) 4. (D)

5. (B) 6. (B)

7. (D) 8. (B)

9. (A) 10. (B)

11. (A) 12. (A)

13. (A) 14. (D)

15. (C) 16. (C)

17. (B) 18. (B)

19. (B) 20. (A)

LEVEL II

3. (A), (C) 4. (B), (C), (D)

5. (A), (D) 6. (A), (B), (C), (D)

7. (A), (C), (D) 8. (A), (B), (C), (D)

9. (B), (C) 10. (D)

COMPREHENSION

1. (D) 2. (A)

3. (B) 4. (A)

5. (B) 6. (C)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-H&T-42

SECTION I

Level I

(Single Choice Questions)

1. A meter washer has a hole of diameter d1 and an external diameter d 2 , where d 2 3d1 .

On heating, d 2 increases by 0.3%. Then d1 will

(a) decrease by 0.1% (b) decrease by 0.3%

(c) increase by 0.1% (d) increase by 0.3%.

change in temperature T is

1

(a) I T (b) I T

2

(c) 2 I T (d) 3 I T .

pendulum with temperature change of T is

1 1

(a) t T (b) t T

2 4

3 1

(c) t T (d) t T.

4 3

4. A steel scale is to be prepared such that the millimeter intervals are to be accurate within

6 10 5 mm. The maximum temperature variation during the ruling of the millimeter marks

( 12 10 6 C 1 ) is

(a) 4.0C (b) 4.5C

(c) 5.0C (d) 5.5C.

5. A block of ice at 10C is slowly heated and converted to steam at 100C. Which of the

following curves represents the phenomenon qualitatively ?

(a) (b)

(c) (d)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-H&T-43

6. A point source of heat of power P is placed at the center of a spherical shell of mean

radius R. The material of the shell has thermal conductivity k. If the temperature

difference between the outer and the inner surface of the shell is not to exceed T, then

the thickness of the shell should not be less than

2 R 2 kT 4 R 2 kT

(a) (b)

P P

R 2 kT R 2 kT

(c) (d) .

P 4P

7. Three rods A, B and C have the same dimensions. Their thermal conductivities are

k A , k B and kC respectively. A and B are placed end to end, with their free ends kept at a

certain temperature difference. C is placed separately, with its ends kept at the same

temperature difference. The two arrangements conduct heat at the same rate. kC must

be equal to

k A kB

(a) k A k B (b)

k A kB

1 k A kB

(c) (k A kB ) (d) 2. .

2 k A kB

8. A cyclic process is shown in the p-T diagram. Which of the curves show the same

process on a V-T diagram ?

P

A C

O T

B C B A

V V

(a) (b)

A C

O T O T

C C

V V

(c) (d)

A B A B

O T O T .

rate of increase of temperatrue of the body is proportional to

(a) T2 T1 (b) T22 T12

(c) T24 T14 (d) T23 T13

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-H&T-44

10. 70 calories of heat are required to raise the temperature of 2 moles of an ideal gas at

constant pressure from 30C to 35C. The amount of heat required in calories to raise

the temperature of same gas through the same range (30C to 35C) at constant volume

is

(a) 30 (b) 50

(c) 70 (d) 90.

11. A black body radiates power P and maximum energy is radiated by it around a

wavelength 0 . The temperature of the black body is now changed such that it radiated

3 0

maximum energy around the wavelength . The power radiated by it now is

4

256 16

(a) P (b) P

81 9

64 4

(c) P (d) P.

27 3

k5 are arranged as shown. The points A and B are

A k5 B

maintained at different temperature such that no thermal

current flows through the central rod. k2 k4

(a) k1k4 k 2 k3 (b) k1 k3 , k 2 k4

k k3

(c) k1k3 k2 k4 (d) 1 .

k 4 k2

13. An ideal gas expands according to the law pV 2 = const. The molar heat capacity C is

(a) CV R (b) CV R

(c) CV 2 R (d) CV 3R .

14. If W1 is the work done in compressing an ideal gas from a given initial state through a

certain volume isothermally and W2 is the work done in compressing the same gas from

the same initial state through the same volume adiabatically, then

(a) W1 W2 (b) W1 W2

(c) W1 W2 (d) W1 2W2 .

15. The rate of emission of a black body at 0C is R. Its rate of emission at 273C is

(a) 4R (b) 8R

(c) 16R (d) 32R.

(a) >0C (b) >100C

(c) > surrounding temperature

(d) it emits radiation at all temperatures (T > 0K)

small detector at distance d1 from it. When the temperature is increased to T2 and the

distance to d 2 , the power received by the detector is unchanged. What is the ratio

d 2 / d1 ?

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-H&T-45

2

T2 T2

(a) (b)

T1 T1

2 4

T1 T2

(c) (d) .

T2 T1

18. Two identical containers joined by a small pipe initially contain the same gas at pressure

p0 and absolute temperature T0 . One container is now maintained at the same

temperature while the other is heated to 2T0 . The common pressure of the gases will be

2 4

(a) p0 (b) p0

3 3

5

(c) p0 (d) 2 p0 .

3

figure. What is the work done by the gas in the process ?

(a) zero (b) positive

T

(c) negative (d) infinite.

a

P

20. The weight of a person is 60 kg. If he gets one kilo-calorie of heat through food and the

efficiency of his body is 28%, then upto how much height he can climb ? Take g = 10 m

s-2

(a) 100 cm (b) 196 cm

(c) 400 cm (d) 1000 cm.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-H&T-46

Level II

(Single Choice Questions)

conductivities 3k , 2k and k . They are arranged as

shown, with their ends at 100C, 50C and 0C. The 2k

100C

temperature of their junction is

200 3k

(a) 75C (b) C k

3

100 0C

(c) 40C (d) C.

3

equivalent 0.02 kg at 15C, till to 80C. The mass of steam condensed (in kg) is (Take

latent heat of steam = 540 cal g-r)

(a) 0.130 (b) 0.065

(c) 0.260 (d) 0.135.

3. An ideal monoatomic gas is taken round the cycle (3P, V) (3P, 3V)

ABCDA as shown in following P-V diagram. The work C D

done during the cycle is

(a) PV (b) 2PV P

(c) 4PV (d) zero. B A

(P, V) (P, 3V)

O V

cyclic processshown in figure, is

(a) 107 J (b) 104 J

10

(c) 102 J (d) 10 3

J.

10 30

P in kPa

5. A cyclic process is shown on the V T diagram. The same process

C

on a P T diagram is shown by

V

D

B

A

O T

A B D A

(a) P (b) P

D C C B

O T O T

C

C B

P P

(c) (d) D

D B

A

A

O T O T .

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-H&T-47

6. Two containers of equal volume contain the same gas at pressure p1 and p2 and

absolute temperature T1 and T2 respectively. On joining the vessels, the gas reaches a

p

common pressure p and a common temperature T. The ratio is equal to

T

p1 p2 1 p1 p2

(a) (b)

T1 T2 2 T1 T2

p1T2 p2T1 p1T2 p2T1

(c) (d) .

T1 T2 T1 T2

the following curves represent the same process ?

p C

D

V

A B D C

(a) T D (b) B

V

C A

p T

B A B

(c) p A (d)

C V

D

D C

T T .

C B

show the same process on a V-T diagram ?

C B C B p

A

p p

(a) (b) O T

A A

V V

C B

p

(c) (d) p

B A A C

V V .

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-H&T-48

C B

as shown in figure. If the net heat supplied to the gas in 2

the cycle is 5 J, the work done by the gas in the process

C A is

(a) - 5 J (b) - 10 J 1 A

(c) - 15 J (d) - 20 J.

P(N/m )

2

10

10. If there is no heat losses, the heat released by the condensation of x grams of steam at

100C into water at 100C converts y grams of ice at 0C into water at 100C. The ratio

y/x is

(a) 1 : 1 (b) 2 : 1

(c) 3: 1 (d) 4 : 1

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-H&T-49

SECTION II

(Other Engg Examination Questions)

1. 125 ml of gas A at 0.60 atmosphere and 150 ml of gas B at 0.80 atmosphere pressure at

same temperature are filled in a vessel of 1 litre volume. The pressure of mixture at the

same temperature will be

(a) 0.195 atmosphere (b) 0.212 atmosphere

(c) 0.120 atmosphere (d) 0.140 atmosphere

The cubical expansion of the metal will be

(a) 2.0 10 5 / C (b) 4.0 10 5 / C

(c) 6.0 10 5 / C (d) 2.33 10 5 / C

3. How much work has to be done in decreasing the volume of an ideal gas by an amount

of 2.4 10 4 m3 at normal temperature and constant normal pressure of 1 105 N / m 2 ?

(a) 24 joule (b) 25 joule

(c) 27 joule (d) 28 joule

4. Helium gas is filled in a closed vessel (having negligible expansion coefficient). When it

is heated form 300 K to 600 K then average kinetic energy of helium atoms will be

(a) half (b) unchanged

(c) two times (d) 2 times

5. The total area of the walls of a room is 137 m2. An electric heater is used to maintain the

temperature inside the room at + 20C, while the outside temperature is 10C. Walls

are made of three layers of different materials. The innermost layer is made of wood 2.5

cm thick middle layer is made of cement 1 cm thick and outermost layer is made of

bricks 25 cm thick. What will be the power of electric heater ? Assume that there is no

loss of heat from the roof and the floor. The coefficient of thermal conductivity of wood,

cement and brick are 0.125, 1.5 and 1 watt/mC respectively.

(a) 9000 watt (b) 8000 watt

(c) 7000 watt (d) 5000 watt

6. When the temperature of a rod is increased by 10C, then its length increases by 1%.

When a cube is made of the material of the rod and its temperature is increased by

10C, then its volume will increase by

(a) 1% (b) 5.6%

(c) 3% (d) 30%

7. The ratio of amount of heat necessary to heat a known mass of water from 0C to 50C

and convert the same mass of ice into steam will be

(a) 5/6 (b) 1/8

(c) 16/31 (d) 5/72

8. The lengths and radii of two rods made of same material are in the ratio 1 : 2 and 2 : 3

respectively. If the temperature difference between the ends for the two rods be the

same, then in the steady state, the amount of heat flowing per second through them will

be in the ratio

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-H&T-50

(a) 1 : 3 (b) 4 : 3

(c) 8 : 9 (d) 3 : 2

9. A hot liquid takes 5 minutes to cool from 70C to 60C. How long will it take to cool from

60C to 50C ?

(a) 5 minutes

(b) more than 5 minutes

(c) less than 5 minutes

(d) less or more than 5 minutes depending on the nature of liquid

10. Two metal A and B are having their initial length in the ratio 2 : 3 and coefficients of

linear expansion in the ratio 3 : 4. When they are heated through same temperature

difference, the ratio of their linear expansions is

(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 3

(c) 3 : 4 (d) 4 : 3

11. The length of a metal rod at 0C is 0.5 m. When it is heated, its length increases by 2.7

mm. The final temperature of the rod is (Coefficient of linear expansion of the metal = 90

10 6/C)

(a) 20C (b) 30C

(c) 40C (d) 60C

12. The pressure and temperature of an ideal gas in a closed vessel are 720 kPa and 40C

respectively. If 1/4th of the gas is released from the vessel and the temperature of the

remaining gas is raised to 353C, the final pressure of the gas is

(a) 1440 kPa (b) 1080 kPa

(c) 720 kPa (d) 540 kPa

13. A steel ball of mass 0.1 kg falls freely from a height of 10 m and bounces to a height of

5.4 m from the ground. If the dissipated energy in this process is absorbed by the ball,

the rise in temperature is (Specific heat of steel = 460 JKg 1C 1, g = 10 ms 2)

(a) 0.01C (b) 0.1C

(c) 1C (d) 1.1C

14. If a metallic sphere gets cooled from 62C to 50C in 10 minute and in the next 10

minute gets cooled to 42C, then the temperature of the surroundings is

(a) 30C (b) 36C

(c) 26C (d) 20C

15. One end of a metal rod of length 1.0 m and area of cross-section 100 cm2 is maintained

at 100C. If the other end of the rod is maintained at 0C, the quantity of heat transmitted

through the rod per minute is (Coefficient of thermal conductivity of material of rod = 100

Wkg 1K Y)

(a) 3 103 J (b) 6 103 J

(c) 9 103 J (d) 12 103 J

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-H&T-51

SECTION III

(More than One Correct Choice Questions)

1. Which of the following expressions for an ideal gas undergoing adiabatic expansion

is/are correct

(a) The expression of workdone is given by p1V1 p 2 V2 / 1

(b) The adiabatic pV lines are steeper than the isothermal lines

(c) p1V1 p 2 V2

(d) T1 1V1 T2 1V2

2. Figure shows is the P-V diagram for a Carnot cycle. In this diagram,

A

B

P

D

C

V

(a) curve AB represents isothermal process and BC adiabatic process

(b) curve AB represents adiabatic process and BC isothermal process

(c) curve CD represents isothermal process and DA adiabatic process

(d) curve CD represents adiabatic process and DA isothermal process

(a) the change in internal energy in a constant-pressure process from temperature T1 to

T2 is equal to nCV (T2 T1), where CV is the molar heat capacity at constant volume

and n is the number of moles of the gas

(b) the change in internal energy of the gas and the work done by the gas are equal in

magnitude in an adiabatic process

(c) the internal energy does not change in an isothermal process

(d) no heat is added or removed in an adiabatic process

4. A spherical black body of radius r radiates power P, and its rate of cooling is R

2

(a) P r (b) P r

1

(c) R r2 (d) R

r

5. Two rods of length L1 and L2 are made of materials of co-efficients of linear expansions

1 and 2 respectively such that L1 1 = L2 2. The temperature of the rods is increased by

T and correspondingly the change in their respective lengths are L1 and L2.

(a) L1 L2

(b) L1 = L2

(c) the difference in the length (L1 L2) is a constant and is independent of rise of

temperature

(d) data is insufficient to arrive at a conclusion

6. A metal rod of length L0, made of material of Youngs modulus Y, area A is fixed

between two rigid supports. The coefficient of linear expansion of the rod is . The rod is

heated such that the compressive force in the rod is T

(a) T L0 (b) T 1/

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-H&T-52

(c) T A (d) T Y

7. The molar specific heat for a gas may have a value given by

dU dQ

(a) C V (b) C P

dT dT P

dU dV

(c) C P (d) data insufficient

dT dT

(a) no work is being done on heating the gas at constant volume

(b) when a gas absorbs heat at constant pressure its volume must change so as to do

some external work

(c) the internal energy is a function of temperature only for an ideal gas

(d) for the same rise of temperature, the internal energy of a gas changes by a smaller

amount at constant volume than at constant pressure

(a) the law of conservation of energy (b) the law of conservation of heat

(c) the law of conservation of work (d) the equivalence of heat and work

10. The following are the p-V diagrams for cyclic processes for a gas. In which of these

processes is heat absorbed by the gas ?

p V

(a) V (b) p

p V

(c) V (d) p

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-H&T-53

SECTION IV

(Match the Columns)

1. Match the physical quantities given in Column I with their dimensional formulas given in

Column II

Column I Column II

A. Specific heat (p) ML2T 2K 1

B. Latent heat (q) M 0 L2T 2 K 1

C. Molar specific heat (r) ML2 T 2 mol 1K 1

D. Thermal capacity (s) M 0 L2 T 2

2. Match the thermodynamic processes on an ideal gas given in Column I with the

corresponding change in internal energy (dU), heat transfer (dQ) and work done (dW)

given in Column II.

Column I Column II

A. Isothermal process (p) dQ = dU + PdV

B. Adiabatic process (q) dW = dU

C. Isochoric process (r) dU = 0

D. Isobaric process (s) dQ = dU

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-H&T-54

SECTION V

(Passage Based Problems)

[Write-up I : Questions 1 to 3]

One mole of a mono-atomic gas is taken through the cycle shown in the given figure :

A B : adiabatic expansion

B C : cooling at constant volume

C D : adiabatic compression

D A : heating at constant volume

The pressure and temperature at A, B etc. are denoted by PA, TA, PB, TB etc., respectively.

Given that

2/5

2 1 2 1

TA = 1000 K, PB PA and PC PA . Given : 0.85 , R = 8.3 J mol K 1.

3 3 3

P A

1. The work done by the gas in the process A B is : B

(a) 1260 Joules (b) 1560 Joules

(c) 1867 Joules (d) 2160 Joules D

C

(a) 1271 Joules (b) 1371 Joules

(c) 5291 Joules (d) 1871 Joules

3. The temperature TD is :

(a) 300 K (b) 400 K

(c) 500 K (d) 600 K

[Write-up II : Questions 4 to 6]

A gaseous mixture enclosed in a vessel of volume V consists of one gram mole of a gas A with

(= CP/CV) = 5/3 and another gas B with = 7/5 at a certain temperature T. The gram molecular

weights of the gases A and B are 4 and 32 respectively. The gases A and B do not react with

each other and are assumed to be ideal. The gaseous mixture follows the equation PV19/13 =

constant, in adiabatic process.

4. Find the number of gram moles of the gas B in the gaseous mixture.

(a) 2 (b) 4

(c) 6 (d) 8

(a) 200 m/s (b) 400 m/s

(c) 600 m/s (d) 800 m/s

6. If T is raised by 1 K from 300 K, find the percentage change in the speed of sound in the

gaseous mixture.

(a) 0.17% (b) 0.27%

(c) 0.37% (d) 10.47%

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-H&T-55

The rectangular box shown in the figure has a partition which can slide without friction along the

length of the box. Initially each of two chambers of the box have one mole of a mono-atomic

ideal gas ( = 5/3) at a pressure P0, volume V0 and temperature T0. The chamber on the left is

slowly heated by an electric heater. The walls of box and partition are thermally insulated. Heat

loss through lead wire of heater is negligible. The gas in left chamber expands, pushing the

partition until the final pressure in both chambers becomes 243p0/32.

(a) 2.25 T0 (b) 4.5 T0

(c) 8.75 T0 (d) 12.93 T0

(a) 2.25 T0 (b) 4.5 T0

(c) 8.75 T0 (d) 12.93 T0

(a) 5.5 T0 J (b) 10.5 T0 J

(c) 15.5 T0 J (d) None of these

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-H&T-56

SECTION VI

LEVEL 1

(Subjective Questions)

1. The ratio of specific heat of a gas at constant pressure to that at constant volume is .

Find the change in internal energy of a mass of gas when the volume changes from V to

2V at constant pressure P ?

2. Find the molar heat capacity in a process of an ideal diatomic gas if it does a work of

Q/4 when a heat of Q is supplied to it?

3. In a room where the temperature is 30C, a body cools from 61C to 59C in 4 minutes.

Find the time taken by the body to cool from 51C to 49C .

4. A sphere of mass 164 g and diameter 6.0 cm floats in a bath in liquid at 0C. The

temperature of the liquid is gradually raised. When the temperature is 50C, the sphere

just begins to sink. If the density of the liquid at 0C is 1.49 g cm 3,find the coefficient of

cubical expansion of the liquid. Neglect the expansion of the sphere.

5. One mole of a certain ideal gas is contained under the weightless piston of a vertical

cylinder at a temperature T. The space over the piston opens into the atmosphere of

pressure p0 . What work has to be done in lifting the piston slowly so that the volume of

the gas under the piston increases isothermally n times?

its emissivity is 0.30. Find the surface area of the filament of a 25 watt lamp. Stefan

constant 5.67 10 8 W m 2 K 4 .

7. A tungsten heater wire of 1 meter is rated at 3 kW m-1 and is 5.0 10 4 m in diameter. It is

embedded along the axis of a ceramic cylinder of diameter 0.12 m. When operating at

the rated power, the wire is at 1500C; the outside of the cylinder is at 20C. Find the

thermal conductivity of the ceramic.

whose walls are kept at 100C. At what rate must energy be supplied to the sphere to

keep its temperature constant at 127C ? Stefan constant 5.67 10 8 J m 2 K 4

path iaf, it is found that Q = 50 cal and W = 20 cal. Along a f

the path ibf, Q = 36 cal (figure) (a) What is W along the

path ibf ? (b) If W = - 13 cal for the curved return path f i, i b

what is Q for this path ? (c) Take U i = 10 cal. What is

O V

Uf ?

(d) If U b = 22 cal, what is Q for the process ib and for the process bf ?

10. The ends of a meter stick are maintained at 100C and 0C. One end of a rod is

maintained at 25C. Where should its other end be touched on the meter stick so that

there is no heat current in the rod in steady state ?

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-H&T-57

Level II

(Subjective Questions)

1. An ideal gas, whose adiabatic exponent is equal to , is expanded so that the

amount of heat transferred to the gas is equal to the decrease of internal energy.

Find

(a) The molar heat capacity of the gas in this process,

(b) The equation of the process in the variables T, V;

(c) The work performed by one mole of the gas when its volume increases

times if the initial temperature of the gas is T0 .

outer surfaces temperature are fixed at 1 and 2 respectively. Inner and outer

radius of shell are r1 and r2 respectively.

3. Two bodies A and B have thermal emissivities of 0.01 and 0.81 respectively. The

outer surface areas of the two bodies are same. The two bodies emit total radiant

power at the same rate. The wavelength B corresponding to maximum spectral

radiancy in the radiation from B is shifted from the wavelength corresponding to

maximum spectral radiancy in the radiation from A by 1.00 m . If the

temperature of A is 5802 K calculate:

(a) The temperature of B and (b) wavelength B .

atmospheric pressure. If the initial temperature of the block is 30C, find (a) the

final temperature of the block, (b) work done by the block on the surroundings

and (c) the change in internal energy of the block. Given specific heat of metal =

400 JKg 1C 1, relative density of metal = 8.0, coefficient of volume expansion of

metal = 8 10 5C 1 and atmospheric pressure = 105Pa.

CP

5. The initial pressure and volume of a given mass of gas are P0 and V0 .

CV

The gas can exchange heat with the surrounding.

V

(a) It is slowly compressed to a volume 0 and then suddenly compressed to

2

V0 / 4 . Find the final pressure.

(b) If the gas is suddenly compressed from the volume V0 to V0 / 2 and then

slowly compressed to V0 / 4 , what will be the final pressure ?

parts by a heat-insulating piston which can move in

the vessel without friction. The left part of the

vessel contains one mole of an ideal monatomic

gas, and the right part is empty. The piston is

connected to the right wall of the vessel through a

spring whose length in free state is equal to the

length of the vessel (figure). Determine the heat

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-H&T-58

capacities of the vessel, piston and spring.

monatomic gas under a piston of mass M. At a certain instant, a heater which

transmits to a gas an amount of heat q per unit time is switched on under the

piston. Determine the established velocity of the piston under the condition

that the gas pressure under the piston is constant and atmospheric pressure is

equal to p0 , and the gas under piston is thermally insulated.

material y are connected as shown in figure. All x x

the rods are of identical length and cross- 60C y 10C

x E

sectional area. If the end A is maintained at A B

60C and the junction E at 10C, calculate y y

temperature of junctions B, C and D. The D

thermal conductivity of x is 0.92 cal/cm-sC and

that of y is 0.46 cal/cm-sC.

g of ice has been added and has all melted the temperature of the flask and

contents is 40C. When a further 80 g of ice has been added and has all melted

the temperature of the whole becomes 10C. Find the specific latent heat of

fusion of ice.

d

cooling k( 0 ) . Its temperature at t = 0 is 1 . The specific heat capacity

dt

of the body is s and its mass is m. Find

(a) The maximum heat that the body can lose and

(b) The time starting from t = 0 in which it will lose 90% of this maximum

heat.

*****

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-H&T-59

(JUDGE YOURSELF AT JEE-LEVEL)

1. A solid body X of heat capacity C is kept in an atmosphere whose temperature is

TA 300 K. At time t 0 the temperature of X is T0 400 K. It cools according to

Newtons law of cooling. At time t1 , its temperature is found to be 350 K.

At this time (t1 ) , the body X is connected to a large body Y at atmospheric temperature

TA , through a conducting rod of length L, cross-sectional area A and thermal conductivity

K. The heat capacity of Y is so large that any variation in its temperature may be

neglected. The

cross-sectional area A of the connecting rod is small compared to the surface area of X.

Find the temperature of X at time t 3t1 .

2P1 B C

cycle ABCA as shown in the P-T diagram (figure). During

the process AB, pressure and temperature of the gas vary

such that PT = constant. If T1 300 K, calculate P1 A

(a) The work done on the gas in the process AB and T

T1 2T1

(b) The heat absorbed or released by gas in each of the process.

Give answers in terms of the gas constant R.

The specific heat capacity c of the container varies with temperature T according to the

empirical relation c = A + BT, where A = 100 cal/kg-K and B 2 10 2 cal/kg-K2. If the

final temperature of the container is 27C, determine the mass of the container.

(Latent heat of fusion for water 8 104 cal/kg, specific heat capacity of water

3

10 cal/kg-K).

4. A 5 m long cylindrical steel wire with radius 2 10 3 m is suspended vertically from a rigid

support and carries a bob of mass 100 kg at the other end. If the bob gets snapped,

calculate the change in temperature of the wire ignoring radiation losses.

(For the steel wire: Youngs modulus = 2.1 1011 Pa; Density = 7860 kg/m3; Specific heat

capacity = 420 J/kg-K).

VD C

cyclic process starting from A as shown in the figure. The

V V V

volume ratios are B 2 and D 4 . If the temperature TA

VA AA VB B

at A is 27C, Calculate VA

A

O TA TB

T

(a) The temperature of the gas at point B,

(b) Heat absorbed or released by the gas in each process,

(c) The total work done by the gas during the complete cycle.

Express your answer in terms of the gas constant R.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-H&T-60

disc having emissivity 0.6 and conductivity 0.167 W/Km

and thickness 1 cm. The temperature is maintained by Oil out

circulating oil as shown :

(a) Find the radiation loss to the surroundings in J/m2 s Oil in

if temperatrue of the upper surface of disc is 127C,

and temperature of surroundings is 27.

(b) Also find the temperature of the circulating oil. Neglect the heat loss due to

convection.

17

Given 10 8 Wm 2 K 4

3

cross-sectional area A = 1 m2 at 300 K, as shown in the figure.

The length of the gas column is 1 m. The gas is now heated to

400 K isobarically.

h=1m

(i) Find the new height of the piston.

(ii) Now the gas is compressed to its initial volume

adiabatically.

Find the final temperature of the gas.

Insulation Ts

maintained constant at T1. Temperature of the surrounding

medium is constant at Ts. Heat comes out of the furnace T1

through a solid cylinder of thermal conductivity K, cross T2

sectional area A and length L. The temperature of the other Furnace

Insulation

end of the cylinder is T2 = Ts + T ( T < < Ts). If T (T1

Ts), find the proportionally constant. The cylinder losses the

heat to the surrounding only through radiation. Emisivity of

the cylinder is .

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-H&T-61

ANSWERS

SECTION I

Level I

(Single Choice Questions)

1. (d) 2. (c)

3. (a) 4. (c)

5. (a) 6. (b)

7. (b) 8. (c)

9. (c) 10. (b)

11. (a) 12. (a)

13 (b) 14. (b)

15. (c) 16. (d)

17. (b) 18. (b)

19. (a) 20. (b)

Level II

(Single Choice Questions)

1. (b) 2. (a)

3. (c) 4. (c)

5. (a) 6. (b)

7. (b) 8. (b)

9. (a) 10. (c)

SECTION II

(Other Engg Examination Questions)

1. (a) 2. (c)

3. (a) 4. (c)

5. (a) 6. (c)

7. (d) 8. (c)

9. (b) 10. (a)

11. (d) 12. (b)

13 (b) 14. (c)

15. (b)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-H&T-62

SECTION III

(More than One Correct Choice Questions)

1. (a, b, c) 2. (a, c)

3. (a, b, c, d) 4. (b, d)

5. (b, c) 6. (c, d)

7. (a, b, c) 8. (a, b)

SECTION IV

(Match the Columns)

SECTION V

(Passage Based Problems)

1. (c) 2. (c)

3. (c) 4. (a)

5. (b) 6. (a)

7. (a) 8. (d)

9. (c)

SECTION VI

Level I

(Subjective Questions)

P(2V) P(V) PV

1. U

1 1

10

2. C R

3

3. 6 min

4. 5.5 10 4 / C

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-H&T-63

5. (n 1) RT RT n n

6. 0.918cm 2

7. 1.77J s 1m 1 K 1

8. 1.78 J s 1

(c) 40 cal (d) 18 cal., 18 cal

10. 25 cm from cold end

Level II

(Subjective Questions)

R 1 /2 2 RT0 [1 1/ ( 1) / 2

]

1. (a) C (b) TV constant (c) W

1 ( 1)

1 1

r1 r

2. 1 ( 1 2 )

1 1

r1 r2

3. (a) 1934 K (b) B = 1.5 m.

5. 2 1

P0 (both cases)

6. C 2R

2 q

7.

5 p0 S Mg

8. TB 30 C ; TC TD 20 C

9. 90 cal/g

n10

10. (a) ms( 1 0 ) (b)

k

1. Tx 300 K (12.5)e 2 KAt1 / CL

(b) QCA = (1200) Rln2

Q AB 2100R , Q BC 1500 R .

3. m 0.495 kg

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P3-H&T-64

4. T = 4.568 10 3 C

5. (a) TB 600 K

(b) 162.6C

Q AB 1500 R

Q BC 831.6R

Q CD 900R ; QP A = 831.6 R

(c) Q = 600 R

6. (a) 595 watt/m2

(b) 162.6C

7. (i) 4 3 m, (ii) 448.8 K

K

8. Proportionality constant =

4 LTs3 K

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-E-35

ELECTROSTATICS

7. Assignment (Subjective Problems)

LEVEL I

line. Find the positions where the charges should be placed such that potential

energy of this system is minimum.

drops 2 mm in diameter through a small hole into a thin walled isolated metal

sphere of diameter 8 cm placed in air until the sphere is filled with water. Ignoring

the thickness of the metal calculate the final potential of the sphere and its

electrical energy.

3. An infinite number of charges each equal to `q are placed along the x-axis at

x = 1, x = 2, x = 4, x = 8, and so on. Find the potential and electric field at the

point x = 0 due to this set of charges. What will be the potential and electric field

if in the above set up the consecutive charges have opposite sign?

particle of mass 0.01 kg and charge 10-6 coulomb is suspended by an

inextensible thread of length 1m. The particle is displaced slightly from its mean

position and released.

(a) Calculate the time period of its oscillation.

(b) What minimum velocity should be given to the particle at rest so that it

completes a full circle in a vertical plane without the thread getting slack?

(c) Calculate the maximum and minimum tensions in the thread in this situation.

5. Two equal charges q are kept fixed at a and +a along the x-axis . A particle of

q

mass m and charge is brought to the origin and given a small displacement

2

along the (a) X-axis and (b) Y-axis. Describe quantitatively the motion in two

cases.

charged particle P of mass m and charge -q (as shown in the figure) at a

distance d from the end A of the strip. Find the velocity of P as it reaches a

point at the distance d/2 from end A.

P

-q + + + + + + + + + + +

A B

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-E-36

7. A thin fixed ring of radius R and positive charge Q is placed in a vertical plane.

A particle of mass m and charge q is placed at the centre of ring. If the particle

is given a small horizontal displacement, show that it executes SHM also find the

time period of small oscillations of this particle, about the centre of ring. (Ignore

gravity)

8. A non-conducting sphere having a cavity as shown R/2

in figure is uniformly charged with volume charge P

density . Find the potential at a point P which is at C R

a distance of x from C.

x

9. A particle of charge q and mass m moves along the x-axis under the action of an

electric field E = k cx, where c is a positive constant and x is distance from the

point, where particle was initially at rest.

Calculate :

(a) distance travelled by the particle before it comes to rest.

(b) acceleration at the moment, when it comes to rest.

+q

10. Charges +q and q are located at the q

figure. Find the electric potential q

energy of the system. +q

q

a +q

q +q

3a

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-E-37

LEVEL II

1. (a) Two similar point charges q 1 and q2 are placed at a distance r apart in air. If a

dielectric slab of thickness t and dielectric constant k is put between the

charges, calculate the coulomb force of repulsion between them.

(b) If the thickness of the slab covers half the distance between the charges, the

coulomb repulsive force is reduced in the ratio 4 : 9. Calculate the dielectric

constant of the slab.

non-conducting semicircular ring of linear R

charge density as shown in the figure.

O x

O

of length 0.8 m. Another identical ball having the same charge is kept at the point

of suspension. Determine the minimum horizontal velocity which should be

imparted to the lower ball so that it can make complete revolution in a vertical

circle. Take g = 10 m/s2.

co-ordinate system. Calculate the electric field at +q

(0,+a)

point P(0, 0, a)? B

(-a, 0) A +q

C -q (0,0, 0) (+a, 0) x

D

(0,-a) -q

30 cm

radius 10 cm and 30 cm are insulated. If the inner

sphere is given a charge 10-4 C and outer 10-6 C, P Q R

O

then calculate the intensity at the points P, Q and 10 cm

R which are situated at distance of 5 cm, 20 cm

and 90 cm from the centre respectively.

10V 20 V 30 V 40 V

30 cm

300

figure (1) and (2). 10 20 30 40 x (cm)

What can you say

10 cm

about the magnitude

Figure 1 60 V

and direction of the

30 V

electric field? Figure 2

20 V

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-E-38

7. A circular ring of radius R with uniform positive charge q is located in the y-z

plane with its centre at the origin O. A particle of mass m and positive charge q is

projected from the point P 3 R ,0,0 on the positive x-axis directly towards O,

with initial speed V. Find the smallest (non zero) value of the speed such that the

particle does not return to P.

8. A very long uniformly charged thread oriented along the axis of a circle of radius

R rests on its centre with one of the ends. The charge of the thread per unit

length is . Find the flux of the vector E across the area enclosing the circle.

placed in front of a small charged Aluminium ball of mass /2

space between the strip and ball offers negligible

resistance to the motion of ball then find the velocity with

which it reaches a distance x from the strip. (The charge

distribution on Aluminium rod is uniform and it is fixed).

three concentric conducting shells are

shown. The charge on the shell of

radius b is q0 . If the innermost and

outermost shells are connected to the a

earth, find their charge densities and the b

potential on the shell of radius b in terms

of a and q0. Given that a : b : c = 1 : 2 : 4 c

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-E-39

LEVEL - I

uniform electric field in time t1. A proton of mass mp, also initially at rest, takes

time t2 to move through an equal distance in this uniform electric field. Neglecting

t

the effect of gravity, the ratio 2 is equal to

t1

1/ 2

me

(A) 1 (B)

mp

1/ 2

mp mp

(C) (D)

me me

oscillating in a uniform electric field as

shown in figure. Its time period as

compared to that when it was

uncharged: + ++ + + ++

(A) will increase (B) will decrease

(C) will not change (D) will first increase then decrease

+ +

charge Q while B is earthed as shown in figure : ++ +

(A) The charge density of A and B are same + A +

(B) The field inside and outside A is zero +

+ + +

(C) The field between A and B is not zero

(D) The field inside and outside B is zero

4. The maximum electric field intensity on the axis of a uniformly charged ring of

charge q and radius R will be

1 q 1 2q

(A) (B)

4 0 3 3R 2 4 0 3R2

1 2q 1 3q

(C) 2

(D)

4 0 3 3R 4 0 2 2R 2

charges q1and q2. Find out the sign of charges

q1

(A) both negative

q2

(B) Upper positive and lower negative

(C) both positive

(D) upper negative and lower positive

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-E-40

6. There are two concentric metal shells of radii r1 and r2(>r1). If the outer shell has

a charge q and the inner shell is grounded, the charge on the inner shell is

(A) zero (B) (r1/r2)q

(C) r1r2q (D)

ABC of side L. The magnitude of electric dipole moment of the system is

(A) qL (B) 2qL

(C) ( 3)qL (D) 4qL

8. Three identical particles of charge Q and mass m are placed such that they form

an equilateral triangle of side . If they are released simultaneously. The

maximum speed attained by any one of the particles will be

1 1

(A) Q (B) Q

2 0m 6 0m

(C) Zero. (D) none of these.

plate of radius r at a distance R (>>r) from its center. The electric flux associated

with the plate is

qr 2 qr 2

(A) (B)

4 0 R2 4 0R2

qR2 q

(C) (D)

4 0r 2 4 0

charge is carried from A to the points B, C, D and E

C

lying on the same circle around q. The work done is

(A) the least along AB A

+q

(B) the least along AD

D

(C) zero along any one of the paths AB, AD, AC E

and AE

(D) the least along AE.

11. Find the charge on an iron particle of mass 2.24 mg, if 0.02 % of electrons are

removed from it.

(A) -0.01996 (B) 0.01996 C

(C) 0.02 C (D) 2.0 C

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-E-41

has a uniform charge density c/m3. It has a spherical

cavity of radius R as shown in the figure. The electric

R

field at the centre of the cavity is

(A) zero. (B) 2 R/ o

3R

(C) 3 R/4 o (D) 7 R/12 o

Cavity

13. The electric potential energy of a uniformly charged thin spherical shell of radius

R having a total charge Q is

(A) Q2/4 0R (B) Q2/6 0R

2

(C) Q / 8 0R (D) Q2/16 0R

14. Two small metallic spheres each of mass m are

suspended together with strings of length and placed

together. When a quantum of charge q is transferred

to each the strings make an angle of 900 with each

other. The value of q is

(A) 0 mg (B) 2 0 mg

(C) 4 0 mg (D) 8 0 mg

15. Two concentric spheres of radii R and r have similar charges with equal surface

density ( ). The electric potential at their common centre is

(A) / 0 (B) (R r )

0

0

at a fixed distance AB apart in a non uniform electric +q

field whose lines of force are shown in the figure

The resultant effect on the two charges is A

(A) a torque in the plane of the paper and no

resultant force -q

(B) a resultant force in the plane of the paper and no

B

torque

(C) a torque normal to the plane of the paper and no

resultant force

(D) a torque normal to the plane of the paper and a

resultant force in the plane of the paper

17. An electron is accelerating in gravity free region in the absence of an electric

field. It will lose its energy in form of

(A) thermal energy (B) loss in gravitational potential energy

(C) electromagnetic radiations (D) none of the above

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-E-42

18. A charge +10 9 C is located at the origin in free space and another charge Q at

(2, 0, 0). If the X-component of the electric field at (3, 1, 1) is zero. The value of

Q is

(A) + 2.4 10 10 C (B) - 6.2 10 20 C

(C) - 4.3 10 10C (D) - 1.2 10 20 C

B

19. The figure shows an infinite line charge of density A

a `unit charge, when it is moved along the path

ABC, is (plane of the curve ABC contains the line C

r

charge)

(A) zero. c/m

(B) ( /2 o)ln2

(C) ( /2 o)ln3

(D) ( /2 o)ln3

flux of electric field due to charge Q, through the surface of hemisphere is

(A) Q/4 0 (B) Q/4 0

(C) Q/2 0 (D) Q/2 0

LEVEL II

electric field due to the sphere at a distance r from its centre

(A) increases as r increases for r < R

(B) decreases as r increases for 0 < r <

(C) decreases as r increases for R < r <

(D) is discontinuous at r = R

2. A parallel plate capacitor with plate area A and separation d has charge Q. A slab of

dielectric constant k is inserted in space between the plates almost completely fills the

space. If E 0 and C0 be the electric field and capacitance before inserting the slab, then

E0

(A) the electric field after inserting the slab is

k

(B) the capacitance after inserting the slab is k C0

1

(C) the induced charge on the slab is Q 1

k

U0

(D) the energy stored in the capacitor becomes , U0 being the energy of the

k

capacitor before inserting the slab

applied across AB. Then C

(A) the potential difference between points C and D is 100V C C

50 V 2C

(B) the potential difference between A and C is 25 V D

B

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-E-43

(D) all the capacitors have equal charge

4. Three very large plates are given charges as shown in the Q 5Q 10Q

figure. If the cross-sectional area of each plate is the same,

then the final charge distribution on the surface of the plates

a, b, c, d, e, f is a b c d e f

(A) 7Q on surface e and 3Q on surface f

(B) -2Q on surface b and 3Q on surface a

(C) -7Q on surface d and 2Q on surface c A B C

(D) the magnitude of charges at all surfaces b, c, d, e is equal

5. S1 and S2 are two equipotential surfaces on which the potentials are not equal

(A) S1 and S2 cannot intersect

(B) S1 and S2 cannot both be plane surfaces

(C) in the region between S1 and S2, the field is maximum where they are closest to

each other

(D) a line of force from S1 to S2 must be perpendicular to both

6. X and Y are large, parallel conducting plates close to each other. Each face has an area

A. X is given a charge Q. Y is without any charge. Point A, B and C are as shown in the

figure

A B C

X Y

Q

(A) the field at B is

2 0A

Q

(B) the field at B is

0A

(D) the fields at A and C are of the same magnitude, but in opposite directions

7. In the circuit shown, the potential difference across the 3mF capacitor is V, and the

equivalent capacitance between A and B is CAB

3 F 6 F

2 F

A 60V B

18

(A) CAB = 4 F (B) CAB = F

11

(C) V = 20 V (D) V = 40 V

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-E-44

8. In the circuit shown, each capacitor has a capacitance C. The emf of the cell is e. If the

switch S is closed

C S

C

C

+

(A) some charge will flow out of the positive terminal of the cell

(B) some charge will enter the positive terminal of the cell

(C) the amount of charge flowing through the cell will be Ce

(D) the amount of charge flowing though the cell will be 4/3Ce

(A the electric field must be zero everywhere on the surface

(B the electric field may be zero everywhere on the surface

(C the net charge inside the surface must be zero

(D the charge in the vicinity of the surface must be zero

10. Figure shows a closed surface which intersects a conducting sphere. If a positive

charged is placed at the point P, the flux of the electric field through the closed surface

closed conducting

surface sphere

(A) will remain zero (B) will become positive

(C) will become negative (D) will become undefined

COMPREHENSION

q1 q2

I. Two points charges q1 = + 1 C and q2 = 2 C are placed at

A and B respectively as shown in the figure. The distance A B

between q1 and q2 is 4 cm. 4cm

1. A line of force emanates from q1 making an angle 90 with AB. This line of force

(A) enters q2 at an angle 90 (B) enters q2 at an angle 60

(C) enters q2 at an angle 45 (D) does not enter q2 but goes off to

(A) over any surface that encloses a volume including A and B, but having very large

radius

(B) over any surface that includes A twice and B once

(C) over any surface that encloses a volume excluding A and B

(D) only over a surface that encloses zero volume

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-E-45

(A) a point on the line AB between q1 and q2 but closer to q 2

(B) a point on the line AB but not between A and B

(C) infinitely many point in space

(D) no point in space

II. When an excess charge is placed on an isolated conductor, it will distribute itself on the

surface of that conductor so that all points of conductor whether on the surface or inside

the conductor becomes to same potential. This is true even if there is a cavity inside the

conductor.

If an isolated conductor is placed in an external electric field, all points of conductor still

come to a single potential regardless of whether the conductor has an excess charge.

The free electrons distribute themselves on the surface in such a way that the electric

field they produce at interior point cancels the external field that would otherwise be

there.

+

+ + +

+ + + + +

+ + +

+ + +

+ + +

(A) + + (B) +

+ + + + +

+ + + + +

+ + + + +

+ + + + +

+ + + + +

+ + + + +

(C) + + (D) + + +

(A) be plane surfaces

(B) be tangential to the direction of field

(C) be spaced such that surfaces having equal difference in potential are separated by

equal distance

(D) have decreasing potential in the direction of field

(A) the electric field and potential must be zero

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-E-46

(C) potential is zero

(D) potential is constant

an uncharged conducting sphere of radius R as shown. R r

A point charge Q is placed at a separation d from the

centre of solid sphere as shown in the figure. Q

Oa d

q r

Column A Column B

(A) Electrostatic potential at point X inside (p) kQ kq kq kQ

the conductor

d R r' r

(B) Electrostatic potential at point O (q) kQ

r2

(C) The magnitude of the electrostatic (r) kQ

field at point X inside the conductor

r

due to the charges induced at the

outermost surface only

(D) Electrostatic potential due to all the (s) kQ kq

induced charges at point X inside the

d R

conductor

2. A parallel plate air capacitor is charged by connecting its plates to a charged capacitor

the terminals of a battery. The battery is disconnected and a

dielectric slab is introduced partially between the plates, as shown

in the figure. Consider the change in the value of each quantity

mentioned in the first column below from the time when no

dielectric slab was introduced to the time when it was, and match

it with the nature of change in it as mentioned in column on the

right.

dielectric slab

Column A Column B

(A) Surface density of charge, (p) Increases.

(B) Electric field intensity, E (q) Decreases.

(C) Charge on the capacitor, q (r) Remains same.

(D) Net force acting on either plate, F (s) Increases at some points decreases

at others.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-E-47

shown. The charges on the shells are Q, 2Q and Q C

B

respectively. A

2Q

1 RQ

Here K .

4 Q

0 2R

3R

Column I Column II

(A) Potential of B (p) KQ

3R

(B) Potential of C (q) KQ

2R

(C) Potential difference between A and C (r) KQ

6R

(D) Potential difference between B and C (s) Zero

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-E-48

9. Hints (Subjective)

LEVEL- I

kq1q2

1. Potential energy =

r

dU

For U to be a minimum, =0

dx

2. q=4 0Vr

kq kq kq

3. V=

1 2 4

kq kq kq

E=

12 22 42

qE

4 (a) g g

m

(b) For minimum velocity consider the extreme case when tension just becomes

zero at the highest point A.

1 1

Conserving energy: mv B2 mv 2A mg qE 2

2 2

(c) Maximum tension is at the lowest point

q q

qx qx

1 2 2

=F 2 2

4 0 a x a x

6. Find the potential at any point and apply energy conservation law.

7. Find the field E at a distance x from the centre of charged ring on the axis.

Consider x << R.

8. Consider negative and positive charge of same volume charge density in the

cavity.

dv dv

9. F = qE, F = v

dt dx

kq1q2

10. Take all possible combination of charges and use .

r12

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-E-49

LEVEL- II

kq

4. E r . Vector sum of field at P due to all the charges.

r3

k

5. Electric field due to an arc at its centre is 2 sin .

R 2

Intensity at the centre due to the circular wire is zero.

Apply principle of superposition.

6. FA FAB FAC

1 q2 60o

2 cos in the direction D to A

4 o a2 2

For equilibrium

Tcos = mg

Tsin = FA

8.

9. Find the electric field at a distance x on the perpendicular bisector. Use

symmetry and apply kinematics principle.

10. Potential at the surface of one shell will be due to combination of other shells too.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-E-50

LEVEL I

4kq 2kq 4

2. 4800 V, 512 10-7 J 3. 2kq, , , kq

3 3 5

3

q d 2 4 0 mR

6. 7. 2

2 0m d qQ

4 1 1 2k qk

8. R3 k 9. (a) (b)

3 x R 2 c m

x2

4

kq2 1 1

10. Potential energy = 2 2 4 1

a 3 5

LEVEL II

q1q 2 q

1. (a) F = 2

(b) k = 4 7.

4 0 r t t k 4 0 mR

2k R

2. 8.

R 2 0

9.

kq i j 2 m

4. Enet 0

2a2 q0

5. 0, 2.25 x 107N/C, 1.12 x 106 N/C 10. inner ,

12 a 2

6

6. (i)200 V/m (ii) 2 q0 q0

r outer = 2

,

96 a 24 0a

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-E-51

LEVEL - I

1 C 2. A

3. C 4. C

5. A 6. B

7. C 8. A

9. B 10. C

11. B 12. D

13. C 14. D

15. C 16. D

17. C 18. C

19. D 20. C

LEVEL - II

3. (A), (B), (C) 4. (A), (B), (C)

5. (A), (C), (D) 6. (A), (C), (D)

7. (A), (D) 8. (A), (D)

9. (B), (C) 10. (B)

COMPREHENSION

1. (B) 2. (C)

3. (C) 4. (D)

5. (D) 6. (D)

1. (A) (s); (B) (s); (C) (q); (D) (p)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-C-22

CAPACITOR

5. Assignment (Subjective Problems)

LEVEL I

up to

P

capacitance between k2 k2

C1 C1

the ends P and Q. The

plates are of area A,

k1 k1

and the distance k2

C2 k2 C2

between them is d. The

k1 k1

dielectric constants are Q up to

k1 and k2 where k1 = 2 k2 k2

C1 C1

and k2 = 4 of material.

V

area A, are maintained at constant potential d

difference V. If the initial separation between

the plates is d, find the work done in

increasing the separation of plates to 2d.

(a) Find the charge on each capacitor and the voltage across each capacitor.

(b) The charged capacitors are disconnected from the line and from each other,

and are now reconnected with terminals of like charge connected together.

Find the final charge on each capacitor and the voltage across each

capacitor.

2 d/2 2 3

of the same dimensions but of dielectric

d

constant 2 and 3 respectively. Find the 3 d/2

ratio of capacities in the two possible A/2 A/3

arrangement.

removed and this capacitor is connected to a second uncharged capacitor. If the

charge is equally distributed on these two capacitors, find the total energy stored

in the two capacitors. Find the ratio of final energy to the initial energy.

6. The distance between the plates of a parallel plate capacitor is 0.05m. A field of

3 x 104 V/m is established between the plates and an uncharged metal plate of

thickness 0.01 m is inserted into the capacitor parallel to its plate. Find potential

difference

(a) Before the introduction of the metal plate.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-C-23

(c) What would be the potential difference if a plate of dielectric constant K = 2 is

introduced in place of metal plate?

7. Two parallel plate capacitors A and B having capacitance 1 F and 5 F are

charged separately to the same potential of 100 volt.

Now the positive plate of A is connected to the negative plate of B and negative

plate of A to the positive plate of B.

Find the final charge on each capacitors and total loss of electrical energy in the

given system.

8. Two spherical conductors of radius R and 2R, having potential 4V, and 2V are

kept isolated. Find the loss in electrostatic energy if they are connected by a

conducting wire.

A

9. Find the equivalent capacitance

between A and B, if the plates have

equal area A. d/2 k1

d

k2 k3

B

which will flow through direction 1 and 2 when k C1

the key is closed.

C2

1 2

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-C-24

LEVEL II

figure is A and they are placed at

distance d apart form each other, then

find the equivalent capacitance between

k1 k2

A and B. The two outer plates are

connected with a conducting wire.

A B

d d d

between its plates is 25 V. Then the charge is shared with a second capacitor

which has air as dielectric. The potential difference falls to 15 V. If the experiment

is repeated with dielectric introduced between the plates of the second capacitor,

the potential difference is 8 V. What is the dielectric constant of the material

introduced?

figure. Under what condition is it equal to zero?

C3 B C4

Metal plate

capacitor. The distance between the

d

plates is given as d. A metal plate of

thickness (d/2), and two dielectric slabs k2

of thickness (d/4) is introduced between v

the plates as shown in the figure. If the

metal plate is removed find the work

done in slowly removing it. (The plates

of capacitor is connected to a battery

having potential difference v)

C

5. Find the equivalent capacitance A

C

below. If the ends A and B are C

connected across a 12 V cell, find the C C

C

electrostatic potential energy of the B

C

system. (the capacitance of each

capacitor is 100 F)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-C-25

S

5 F. Find the charge that will flow through

MN when the switch S is closed.

C C

M N 50 V

potential differences on the plates of C2

C1

capacitors C1 = 3 F, C2 = 7 F, if value of

E1 = 12kV, E2 = 13kV.

E2

and B, if the plates have equal area A and

the separation between the plates is d.

9. A uniform electric field E exists between the plates of a capacitor. The plate

length is and the separation of the plates is d.

(a) An electron and a proton start from the negative plate and positive plate

respectively and go to the opposite plates. Which of them wins this race?

(b) An electron and a proton are projected parallel to the plates from the midpoint

of the separation of plates at one end of the plates. Which of the two will have

greater deviation when they start with the

(i) same initial velocity

(ii) same initial kinetic energy, and

(iii) same initial momentum?

square plates of edge a and plate separation d.

The gap between the plate is filled with a

dielectric of dielectric constant k which varies

from the left plate to the right plate as k = ko + k

x, where ko and are positive constants and x

is the distance from the left end. Calculate the

capacitance.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-C-26

LEVEL - I

and B is C

(A) C A

B

(B) 2C C

C

(C) 1.5 C

(D) none of the above C

charged to a potential Vo. The heat generated in the C

+ S

circuit when the switch S is closed, is

(A) C Vo2 (B) 2C Vo2

(C) 4C Vo2 (D) 8C Vo2 3Vo

3. The plates of a parallel plate charged capacitor are not parallel, the interface

charge density is

(A) is higher at the closer end (B) is non-uniform

(C) is higher at inclined plate. (D) none of the above

difference V. These capacitors are then reconnected, in series. The potential

difference between the extreme ends is :

(A) zero (B) nV

(C) (n 1) V (D) none of the above

5. The force with which the plates of a pa0rallel plate capacitor having a charge Q

and area of each plate A, attract each other is

(A) directly proportional to Q2 and inversely to A.

(B) inversely proportional to Q2 and directly to A.

(C) does not depend upon Q2 and is inversely proportional to A.

(D) none of the above

A

for the given figure is

(A) 1 F (B) 2 F 2 F 2 F 3 F

(C) 3 F (D) 4 F

B

3 F 3 F 3 F

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-C-27

A

7. The equivalent capacitance between A and B is

C

(A) 6 C C

(B) 4C C

(C) 2C C C C

B

(D) none of the above

plate capacitor. If the distance between plates is reduced by 3.5 mm, the

capacity of the capacitor remains same. Find the dielectric constant of the

medium.

(A) 2 (B) 4

(C) 6 (D) 8

(A) 0.5 F (B) 1.5 F A 1 F

(C) 2 F (D) 2.5 F 1 F 2 F

B

2 F

successive plates is C, then the

B

capacitance of the equivalent system A

between A and B is

C

(A) (B) 3C

3

2 3

(C) C (D) C

3 2

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-C-28

LEVEL II

1. Two capacitors are once connected in parallel and then in series. If the

equivalent capacitance in two cases are 16F and 3F respectively, then

capacitance of each capacitor is

(A) 16 F, 3F (B) 12 F, 4 F

(C) 6F, 8F (D) none of these

parallel plate capacitor as shown. With what factor A

the effective capacitance increases ?

d k1 k2

k1k 2 k k2

(A) (B) 1

k1 k 2 2

2k1k 2

(C) (D) none of above

k1 k 2

10 V

3. What is the energy stored in the capacitor between

terminals a and b of the network shown in the figure?

(Capacitance of each capacitor C = 5 F). C C

(A) 1 J (B) 0.25 J a

b

C C

(C) zero. (D) 15.6 J

conducting spring of stiffness K and the other plate is fixed. The other end of the

spring is also fixed. In equilibrium distance between the plates is d, which is twice

of the elongation in the spring. If length of the spring is halved by cutting it, the

distance between the plates in equilibrium will be (Consider that in both the

cases spring is in nature length, if the capacitor is uncharged)

3d 5d

(A) (B)

4 4

3

(C) 2d (D) d

2

DC source in series. When one of the plates of one capacitor is brought closer to

other plate

(A) the voltage on the capacitor whose plates came closer is greater than the

voltage on the capacitor whose plates are not moved.

(B) the voltage on the capacitor whose plates came closer is smaller than the

voltage on the capacitor whose plates are not moved.

(C) the voltage on the two capacitors remain equal.

(D) the applied voltage is divided equally between the two capacitors.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-C-29

6. You are given 32 capacitors of 4 F capacitance each. How do you connect all of

them so that the effective capacitance becomes 8 F?

(A) 4 capacitors in series and 8 such groups in parallel.

(B) 2 capacitors in series and 16 such groups in parallel.

(C) 8 capacitors in series and 4 such groups in parallel.

(D) All of them in series.

earthed. The capacitance of the system is

a b

4 ab 4 b2

(A) (B)

b a b a

(C) 4 0 (b + a) (D) none of these

the key K is equal to

C C

(A) CV (B) V

2 1 2C

(C) 2CV (D) zero

V

+

of 2 F is 2 F

6 F

(A) 10 V (B) 60 V

(C) 28 V (D) 56 V 3 F

70V

(A) 4.27 V (B) 17 V

(C) zero (D) 34V 4 F 1 F

O

+6v +3v

3 F 3 F

+3v

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-C-30

7. Hints (Subjective)

LEVEL- I

1. Find the value of C1 and C2 and analyse it as the series parallel combination.

2. The capacitance changes so the energy changes.

3. The charges in series combination are equal.

4. In first case, capacitors in series and in second case they are in parallel.

5. Total charge remains conserved.

6. If capacitance changes, the electrostatic energy changes.

7. Find the equivalent capacitance and charge distribution.

8. Find common potential and electrostatic potential energy.

9. Capacitance with dielectrics k 2 , k 3 are in parallel and capacitor with dielectric

10. Compare the charge distribution in both the cases.

LEVEL- II

2. The total charge has to be conserved.

3. Charge on C1 and C2 will be equal and C3 & C4 will be equal.

4. Find out total energy in both the cases and difference between them.

5. Apply series parallel concept.

6. Find the equivalent capacitance

7. Apply KVL and charge conservation.

8. Potential on extreme plates will be equal and potential on inner plates will be

equal.

9. Force on the charges is due to electric field. Find accelerations. Use kinematics.

10. Take an elemental capacitance of thickness dx. Write capacitance for this then

integrate.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-C-31

LEVEL I

2

1 0 AV

1. Ceq = 1.07 0A /d 2. W=

4 d

3200

3. (a) 800 C, 800V, 800 C, 400V. (b) 1600/3V,1600/3 C, C

3

24 1

4. 5. 2.5J,

25 2

6. (a) 1500 Volt (b) 1200 Volt (c) 1350 Volt

2

5 16 0Rv

7. 0.6 x 10-4C; 3.33 x 10-4C; x 10 2

J 8.

3 3

2A 0 (k 2 k 3 )(k1 )

9.

d 2k1 k 2 k 3

c 1c 2

10. Charge flown through path 2= -

c1 c2

Charge flown through path 1= c2

LEVEL II

A 0 k1k 2 k1 k 2

1. 2. 3.2

d (k1 k 2 )

C2C3 C1C4

3. A B E , when C1/C2 = C3/C4.

C1 C2 C3 C4

4 A 0 v 2k12k 22

4.

d(k1 k 2 )(k1 k 2 2k1k 2 )

2 0A

7. 700 V, 300V 8.

d

9. (a) Electron (b) (i) Electron (ii) Both equal deviation (iii) Proton

2

0a

10.

d

ln 1

K0

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P4-PH-C-32

LEVEL - I

1. A 2. D

3. A 4. B

5. A 6. A

7. C 8. D

9. C 10. B

LEVEL - II

1. B 2. B

3. C 4. B

5. B 6. A

7. B 8. B

9. B 10. A

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM379P4-PH-CE-38

CURRENT ELECTRICITY

10. Assignment (Subjective Problems)

LEVEL I

equivalent resistance of the loop between the points (a) A and B, (b) A and C

and (c) A and D.

in the circuits shown in figure

a b

R3

E2 R2

2 4A 2

3. Find the P.D. between points A and

B in the branch of a circuit shown 5v

9v

in figure. Which point is at higher

potential A B

V1 and V2 are two voltmeters having

S

resistances 6000 and 4000 respectively

V1 V2

E.M.F. of the battery is 250 volts, having

6000 4000

negligible internal resistance. Two

resistances R1 and R2 are 4000 and E=250V

6000 respectively. Find the reading of the

voltmeters V1 and V2 when

(i) Switch S is open

(ii) Switch S is closed

deflection of 50 divisions when joined in series with a resistance of 20 k and a

2 volt battery, what is the current sensitivity of galvanometer (in div/ A) ?

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM379P4-PH-CE-39

3

along with current flowing in the 2 6 D

branches, with value of each A I1

2 amp

resistance is shown in figure. 4 F

2

3 I3

Calculate the energy stored in the 2 amp I2

B C 4

capacitor C. 3

6

1 amp

and the power dissipated in the entire

4

circuit shown in figure. The emf of the 8

battery is 1.8 V and its internal resistance 2 6

is 2/3 .

6

that it takes 50 ms for the charge on the capacitor to become 12.6 C. Find the

resistance of the circuit.

connected across a 120 V power line

shown in figure. Find (a) the voltage

B C

across each bulbs (b) the total power

dissipated in the three bulbs.

power of 1000 watts in a 100 volt line.

It is connected in combination with a

R

resistance R, to a 100 volt mains as

shown in figure what should be the

100 V

value of R so that the heater may

operate with a power of 62.5 watts.

11. Two resistors 400 ohm and 800 ohm are connected in series with a 6V battery. It

is desired to measure the current in the circuit. An ammeter of10 ohm resistance

is used for this purpose. What will be the reading in the ammeter? Similarly if a

voltmeter of 10, 000 ohm resistance is used to measure the potential difference

across 400 ohm, what will be the reading of the voltmeter?

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM379P4-PH-CE-40

10 r1 8V

connected in series with a resistance of 24 in the V

external circuit.

If the internal resistances of each of these cells in ohm

are 200% of the value of their emf respectively, find the

R = 24

current in the circuit.

measure the current when connected in series with a resistance of 90 and a

battery of internal resistance 10 . It is observed that when the shunt resistances

are10 and 50 respectively, the deflection are respectively 9 and 30 divisions.

What is the resistance of the galvanometer ?

AC in the steady state as also the charge on

the capacitor C. If the externally applied R

potential are now withdrawn, how will the R

charge on the capacitor vary as a function of

A C

time? (R = 1k , C = 10 F) 5V R 0V

C1 = 1 F, C2 = 2 F and E = 6V. Calculate charge R1 C1

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM379P4-PH-CE-41

LEVEL II

100 resistor through an ammeter. The resistance of the ammeter is 4/3 . A

voltmeter is also connected to find the potential difference across the resistor.

(i) Draw the circuit diagram.

(ii) The ammeter reads 0.02A. What is the resistance of the voltmeter?

(iii The voltmeter reads 1.10 V. What is the error in reading?

B

between the points A and B between

the points B and C of figure in steady 3 F 1 F

state.

1 F

A 20 10 C

100 V

3. Find the equivalent resistance of the circuits shown in figure between the points a

and b. Each resistor has a resistance r.

a b

a b

A

calculate potential difference

between A and B. 4V 2 3 1

4V

B

resistance R as shown in the figure,

calculate the equivalent resistance F

between the junctions A and E.

E G

A C

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM379P4-PH-CE-42

R

are connected through a battery of 10 V. R R

R

When cell is switched on, find

(i) maximum current in the circuit R R

(ii) energy stored in capacitor after time t.

V

E2 = 2 volts, E3 = 6 volts, R1 = 6 , R2 = 2

R3 = 4 , R4 = 3 and C = 5 F. Find the C R2 R3

current in R3 and energy stored in the

capacitor at steady state. E2

R4

E3

S

varies with time t (figure) after the shorting

of the switch S at the moment t = 0 E R C

reads 30 V when it is connected across V

300

400 resistance. Calculate what the

same voltmeter will read when it is 400

connected across the 300 resistance.

60 V

10. An ammeter and a voltmeter are connected in series to a battery with emf

E = 6.0 V. When a certain resistance is connected in parallel with the voltmeter,

the reading of the latter decreases = 2.0 times, whereas the reading of the

ammeter increases by the same factor. Find the voltmeter reading after the

connection of the resistance.

A C B

are connected as shown in figure. A D

R R

battery of 2 V and internal resistance

0.1 is connected across the circuit.

Calculate the value of R for which the

2V, 0.1

heat generated in the circuit is maximum.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM379P4-PH-CE-43

R1

O

the potentials of the points 1, 2, and 3 are equal R3

to 1 = 10V, 2 = 6V and 3 = 5V.

3

of a capacitor C in the circuit shown in figure. If the A B

sources have emf's E1 = 4.0 V and E2 = 1.0 V and the E2

R2 R1

resistances are equal to R1 = 10 , R2 = 20 , and R3

= 30 . The internal resistances of the sources are

negligible E1

between points A and B of the circuit (figure).

Find the magnitude and direction of the current A B

flowing through the segment CD if the

R3 R4

resistances are equal to R1 = 1.0 , R2 = 2.0 ,

R3 = 3.0 and R4 = 4.0 . D

R R

A

2R 2R

B

R R

Find the equivalent resistance between A and B.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM379P4-PH-CE-44

LEVEL I

(A) increases. (B) decreases.

(C) remains constant. (D) initially increases then decreases.

R1 R2

& R2, a condenser C and switches S1

and S2 are connected in a circuit as C

V

shown in figure. The capacitor C gets S2

S1

fully charged to V volts when

(A) S1 & S2 are both closed (B) S1 & S2 are both open

(C) S1 closed and S2 open (D) S2 closed & S1 open.

a circuit between A and B is A B

3 6 6

3

(C) 6 (D)

2

4. In the circuit shown in figure, the voltmeter reading

would be

3V

(A) 0 volt. (B) 0.5 volt. A V

(C) 1 volt. (D) 2 volt. 1 2

T2

T2 are as shown in the figure, (T2 T1) is proportional

to V T1

(A) cos 2 (B) sin 2

(C) cot2 (D) tan 2

I

its resistance is

(A) 0.2 % increase (B) 0.2% decrease

(C) 0.1 % increase (D) 0.1 % decrease

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM379P4-PH-CE-45

R1 R2

7. In the circuit shown in figure E1 = 7V, E2 = 7V R1 = R2 =

1 and R3 = 3 respectively. The current through the

E1 E2

resistance R3 is R3

(A) 2A

(B) 3.5A

(C) 1.75A

(D) none of these

I

the current I is

6A 1A

(A) 1 A (B) 3A

(C) 2 A (D) 4 A 2A

3A

potential difference between the terminals of the cell must be

(A) E (B) E/2

(C) E/4 (D) 3E/2

conductor is 50 mm2 then value of the current density in Am 2 is

(A) 0.5 (B) 1

1

(C) 10 (D) 3/10

500

11. In the adjoining circuit, the battery E1 has an G

E.M.F. of 12 volts and zero internal resistance.

E1 X E2

While the battery E2 has an E.M.F. of 2 volts if

the galvanometer G reads zero than the value

of the resistance X in ohms is

(A) 10 (B) 100

(C) 14 (D) 200

shown in the figure. Equivalent resistance between points A

and B is

3 4

(A) R (B) R B

5 3

9

(C) R (D) R

5

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM379P4-PH-CE-46

1A

13. Referring to the adjoining circuit which of the following is/are A

R

true

(A) R = 80 ohms

4

(B) R = 6 ohms

(C) R = 10 ohms

(D) Potential difference between points A & E is 2V

14. In a gas discharge tube if 3 1018 electrons are flowing per sec from left to right

and 2 1018 protons are flowing per second from right to left a given cross

section the magnitude and direction of current through the cross section

(A) 0.48A, left to right (B) 0.48 A, right

(C) 0.80A, left to right (D) 0.80 A, right to left

15. In a portion of some large electrical network, current in certain branches are

known. The values of (VA - VB) and (VC - VD) are X and Y respectively. Where x

and y are

7A 5V

2 4 6

A

3V 4V 2A B

8 10

9V 3A

D

C

(C) X = 58 V, Y = 52 V (D) X = 29 V, Y = 26 V

16. A 50 V battery is connected across a 10 resistor and a current of 4.76 A flows. The

internal resistance of the battery is

(A) 0.5 (B) 0.1

(C) 0.2 (D) 0.3

17. For the circuit shown which of the following statements is true ?

V 1 = 30V V2 = 20V

S1 S3 S2

+ +

C1 = 2pF C2 = 3pF

(B) with S3 closed V1 = V2 = 25 V

(C) with S1 & S2 closed, V1 = V2 = 0

(D) with S1 and S3 closed, V1 = 30 V, V2 = 20 V

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM379P4-PH-CE-47

18. In the given circuit ammeter and voltmeter are ideal and 3 6 V,1

V 3

voltmeter and ammeter is

3

4 4 A

(A) zero, (B) V, zero

3 3

(C) 6 A, 0.1 A (D) 3.6 V, 0.6A

19. The maximum power dissipated by external resistance R by a cell of an external

emf E and internal resistance r is E2/4R which is obtained for

(A) R < r (B) R > r

(C) R = r (D) any value of R.

length 1m. Assuming one free electrons per atom. The drift speed of the free

electrons in the wire will be

(Density of metal =5 103 kg/m3, atomic weight = 60)

(A) 5 10 3 m/s (B) 2 10 3 m/s

(C) 4 10 3 m/s (D) 7.5 10 3 m/s

the circuit is the same whether the cells are connected in series or in parallel

then the internal resistance r of each cell is given by

(A) r = R/n (B) r = nR

(C) r = R (D) r = 1/R

22. A cell of e.m.f. E and internal resistance r is connected in series with an external

resistance nr then the ratio of the terminal potential difference to E.M.F. is

1

(A) 1/n (B)

n 1

n n 1

(C) (D)

n 1 n

of resistance Rv is used. To measure the potential with a minimum accuracy of

95 % then

(A) Rv = 5R (B) Rv = 15 R

(C) Rv = 10 R (D) Rv 19 R

24. A cell of E.M.F. E and internal resistance r supplies currents for the same time t

through external resistance R1 and R2 respectively. If the heat produced in both

cases is the same then the internal resistance is

1 1 1 R R2

(A) (B) r = 1

r R1 R 2 2

(C) r = R1R 2 (D) r = R1 + R2

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM379P4-PH-CE-48

resistance R, the amount of charge which has passed in the circuit in 4 minutes,

if the variable resistance R is increased at the rate of 5 ohm/min.

(A) 120 coulomb (B) 120 loge2 coulomb

120 60

(C) coulomb (D) coulomb

loge 2 loge 2

A B

wires of resistance x ohms/metre. Similar wires are I1

connected across the diagonals AC & BD. The ax ax

effective resistance between the corners A & C will be

a 2x

(A) (2 2) ax (B) 6ax a 2x

27. To get maximum current in a resistance of 3 , one can use n rows of m cells

(connected in series) connected in parallel. If the total no. of cells is 24 and the

internal resistance is 0.5 ohm then

(A) m = 12, n = 2 (B) m = 8, n = 3

(C) m = 2, n = 12 (D) m = 6, n = 4

28. In the circuit below the resistance R has a value that

depends on the current. Specifically, R is 20 ohms

R

when I is zero and the increase in resistance in ohms is 250 V

numerically equal to one half of the current in amperes.

What is the value of current I in circuit ?

(A) 8.33 amp (B) 10 amp

(C) 12.5 amp (D) 18.5 amp

29. The potential difference between points A & B in a section of a circuit shown is

(A) 5 volts (B) 1 volts

(C) zero volts (D) 13 volts

1 amp. 2 amp.

2 2 2 2

1 B

3 amp. A 1

3V 2V

resistances r1 and r2 are connected in series with an e, R1 e, R2

external resistance 'R'. the potential drop across the

first cell is found to be zero. The external resistance

R is R

(A) r1 - r2 (B) r1 / r2

(C) r1 r2 (D) r1 + r2

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM379P4-PH-CE-49

LEVEL II

A G C

grounded as shown. Which of the following is

a wrong statement? 2 3

(A) Potential at E is zero

(B) Potential at D is zero A E

10 V 3V

(C) The current in the circuit will be 0.5 A G 4

F

(D) The current in the circuit is same whether or D

not F is grounded

(A) potential difference, V I (electric current)

(B) electric current density, J E (electric field)

v

(C) , symbols having usual meaning

I A

v

(D) resistance, R constant

I

a dc source. The resistance of all the edges of the tetrahedron

are equal. Choose the correct statement (s)

(A) the electric current through DC is zero

(B) if we remove anyone of the edges AD, AC, DB or BC, the

change in current remain same

(C) the current through AB is maximum

(D) the change in current will be same if AB or DC is removed

A battery of emf E may be connected across the ring in two ways : B D

Case I : Battery is connected between B and D

Case II : Battery is connected between A and B.

Choose the correct statement(s)

(A) In each case same current flows out of the battery A

(B) In case I more current comes out of the battery

(C) In case II more current comes out of the battery

(D) In case I resistance is more than in case II

5. A piece of germanium (material used for making semiconductors) and a piece of copper

(material used for making conducting wires) are cooled from room temperature to 85 K.

R1 and R2 be the resistance of the pieces respectively and 1 and 2 are the temperature

coefficients of resistance of materials respectively.

(A) R1 decreases and R2 increases (B) R1 increases and R2 decreases

(C) 1 < 0, 2 >0 (D) 1 > 0, 2 >0

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM379P4-PH-CE-50

6. A number of resistors R1, R2, R3, are connected in series such that Rs is the

equivalent resistance of series combination. A current I is flowing in the circuit due to a

potential V applied across the circuit. V 1, V2, V3, .. are potentials across R1, R2,

R3, respectively.

(A) same current I will flow through each resistor

(B) V1 + V2 + V3 + .. = V

R1 R2 R3

(C) V1 = V, V2 V, V3 V ;

RS RS RS

(D) data insufficient

7. A circuit has an equivalent resistance R0. A voltmeter of resistance Ru is applied across

the circuit to measure the potential drop across R 0. The new equivalent resistance of the

circuit is

R 0R

(A) R0 (for R0 < < R ) (B)

R0 R

(C) R0 + R (D) data insufficient

2

0.2 F

6V 2.8

(A) a current of 0.9 A flows through 2 resistor when steady state is reached

(B) a potential drop of 4.2 V appears across the resistance 2.8

(C) a potential drop of 1.8 V appears across the capacitor C

(D) a potential 4.2 V appears across the capacitor C

9. In the given circuit the point A is 9 V higher than point B

A B C D

6V 15V 24V

1 2 1

R

(A) R = 1 (B) R = 7

(C) potential difference between B and D is 30 V

(D) potential difference between B and C is 15 V

(A) in parallel, the combination acts as a fuse of rating 20 A

(B) in parallel, the combination acts as a fuse of rating 5 A

(C) in series, the combination acts as a fuse of rating 10 A

(D) in series, the combination acts as a fuse of rating 20 A

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM379P4-PH-CE-51

COMPREHENSION

R R

resistance R each as shown in the figure. R R

A R B

R R R

D E

5 1

(A) R (B) R

11 11

15 6

(C) R (D) R

11 11

(A) the ratio of current through CF and DE is 1

(B) the ratio of current through CD and FE is 1

(C) the ratio of current through AC and AD is 6/5

(D) the ratio of current through AC and AD is 5/6

(A) C and D are at same potential (B) VC + VE = VA + VB

(C) VD + VF < VA + VB (D) E and C are at same potential

uniform wire AB (shown in the figure) has a total r=1

resistance of 99 . (The galvanometer shown in figure

has zero resistance) 99 cm

A B

1 Jockey

G

cell

4. When jockey is touchal with wire AB at point C such that AC = 40 cm. There is no

current in galvanometer. So emf of cell is

(A) 4 V (B) 5/4 V

(C) 5 V (D) 6 V

(A) 6.93 volt (B) 8.93 volt

(C) 9.93 volt (D) None of the above

(A) 3 volt (B) 2.5 volt

(C) 2 volt (D) None of the above

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM379P4-PH-CE-52

across the terminals of the battery.

Column I Column II

(A) Current in the circuit is maximum (p) R

when

(B) Potential difference across the (q) R=0

terminals is maximum when

(C) Power delivered to the resistor is (r) E

maximum when i

r

(D) Power delivered to the load is zero (s) r=R

when

(Item of Column I can match one or more than one item in Column II)

2. Assume a tetrahedron ABCD made up of conducting wires, r D

C

each side of which has resistance r. Now match the following r

column : r r

r

A r B

Column I Column II

(A) Two dimensional equivalent of the (p) D

tetrahedron r

r C r

r r

A r B

(B) Equivalent resistance between C and (q) D

r r r

D r

2

A r r

B

C

r

(C) If a battery is connected between any (r) C

two points, the potentials of the other A B

two points are always equal

D

r

(D) If a battery is connected between any (s) C

two points, the electric current coming

out is same

A B

3. Column I shows some circuits and Column II its equivalent resistance between 1 and 2.

(All resistances are equal to R)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM379P4-PH-CE-53

Column I Column II

(A) 1 (p) 8

R

7

2

(B) (q) R

1 2

(C) (r) R

2

1 2

(D) (s) 2R

1 2

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM379P4-PH-CE-54

LEVEL- I

2. Apply KVL and KCL.

3. Apply KVL from A to B.

4. When switch is open V1 and V2 are in series.

5. Find current through Galvanometer

6. Apply KVL, KCL

7. Note that 3, 8 + 6, 2 + 4 and 6 ohm are in parallel.

8. Apply equation for charging of capacitor.

9. Find out resistance of each bulb.

10. Find out resistance of heater, then current through it.

11. Total resistance of the circuit equals to (400 + 800 + 10) ohm.

13. Apply Galvanometer formula. Deflection is proportional to current.

14. For the capacitor charging resistance equals to 2R R / 2R + R, Pd = 5 V.

LEVEL- II

2. Total potential difference across 3 F and 1 F in the upper branch which are in

series equals to 100 V.

3. Is there a hidden Wheatstone bridge somewhere ?

4. Current flowing in a each loop is independent of the other loop. Find the current

then apply KVL.

5. Note symmetry of the circuit and equipotential points.

6. Write basic differential equation for charging of each capacitors by 18 KVL. First

find the potential difference across C at steady state, time constant equals to

RC

.

2

7. At steady state no current in C. Then apply KVL to remaining circuit.

9. From the data it is clear that voltmeter resistance is such that equivalent

resistance of 400 ohm and Rv is 300 ohm.

10. Apply the concept of shunt resistance.

11. Make A and D as a single point and B and C as common point.

12. Assume potential of point O is 0 and write KCL for point O.

13. No current through C. Apply KVL to remaining circuit.

14. CD has some resistance. Current through CD equals to current through R1

current through R2.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM379P4-PH-CE-55

LEVEL I

E1 E2

R1 R2

1. (a) 2.08 , (b) 3.33 , (c) 3.75 2.

1 1 1

R1 R2 R3

1 DIv

5. 6. 1.8 10 3 J

2 A

7. 0.4 A, 1.62 W 8. 5k

13. 233

t

14. 5 mA, 50 C, q(t) = 50 C e 6. 67ms 15. q1=2 C, q2 = 12 C

LEVEL II

r 4r

3. , 4. - 0.5 V

2 5

7R 1

5. 6. .666 A , CV 2 (1 e t / RC 2

)

12 2

2t

-6 E RC

7. 1.5 A, 14.4 10 J. 8. 1 e

2

9. 22.4 V 10. 2V

11. 0.3 12. 0.202 A

13. - 1V 14. 1A

15. ( 5 + 1)R

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM379P4-PH-CE-56

LEVEL I

1. A 2. C

3. D 4. A

5. C 6. A

7. A 8. B

9. B 10. B

11. B 12. A

13. B 14. D

15. C 16. A

17. D 18. D

19. C 20. B

21. C 22. C

23. D 24. C

25. B 26. A

27. A 28. B

29. D 30. A

LEVEL II

3. (A), (B), (C) 4. (C), (D)

5. (A), (C) 6. (A),(B), (C)

7. (A), (B) 8. (A), (B), (C)

9. (B), (C) 10. (A), (C)

COMPREHENSION

1. (C) 2. (C)

3. (B) 4. (A)

5. (A) 6. (D)

MATCH THE FOLLOWING

1. (A) (q), (r); (B) (p); (C) (s); (D) (q), (p), (r)

2. (A) (p), (q), (r), (s); (B) (p), (q), (r), (s); (C) (p), (q), (r), (s); (D) (p), (q), (r), (s)

3. (A) (q); (B) (r); (C) (r); (D) (p)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Terminal), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26854102, Fax :

26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-M-27

MAGNETICS

8. Subjective Problems

LEVEL I

1. Two straight infinitely long and thin parallel wires are spaced 0.1 m apart and

carry a current of 10 ampere each. Find the magnetic field at a point which is at a

distance of 0.1 m from both wires in the two cases when the currents are in the

(a) same and (b) opposite directions (Given o = 4 10-7 Tm/A).

2. A beam of protons with a velocity 4 105 m/sec enters a uniform magnetic field of

0.3 Tesla at an angle of 60o to the magnetic field. Find the radius of the helical path

taken by the proton beam. Also find the pitch of the helix, which is the distance

travelled by a proton in the beam parallel to the magnetic field during one period of

rotation. [Mass of proton =1.67 10-27 Kg, charge on proton = 1.6 10-19 C]

3. A long horizontal wire P carries a current of 50A. It is rigidly fixed. Another fine

wire Q is placed directly above and parallel to P. The weight of wire Q is

0.075 N/m and carries a current of 25A. Find the position of wire Q from P so that

the wire Q remains suspended.

through it. Calculate the magnetic induction at

(a) the centre of the coil

(b) at a point on the axis 8 cm away from the centre.

5. (a) A proton is moving in a magnetic field. The field B is into the plane of the

page. The velocity vector v lies in the plane of the page, perpendicular to B .

Describe the motion of proton.

(b) In part (i), if the radius of the circle is 0.5m and the magnitude of the magnetic

field is 1.2 Wbm-2 , find the frequency of revolution and the kinetic energy of

the proton. Charge of the proton = 1.60 10-19 C. Mass of the

-27

proton=1.67 10 kg.

B

6. In the framework of wires shown in figure, a i

R2

Calculate the magnetic induction at the centre

O. If angle is equal to 90 , then what will be O

the value of magnetic induction at O ? R1

E i

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-M-28

7. A loop of flexible conducting wire of length 0.5 m lies in a magnetic field of 1.0T

perpendicular to the plane of the loop. Show that when a current is passed

through the loop, it opens into a circle. Also calculate the tension developed in

the wire if the current is 1.57 amp.

8. A beam of protons move undeviated through a region of space having uniform

transverse electric and magnetic fields. These fields are mutually perpendicular

and their values are 120kv/m and 50 mT respectively. If this beam strikes a

grounded target, then what will be the force exerted by the beam on the larger.

Given that beam current is equal to I = 0.8mA and mass of the

proton= 1.673 10 27 kg .

straight portion AB. If current flowing in the wire is i O

i, find the magnetic induction at the centre O. 2 R

A B

C

and b of arbitrary shape of figure is the F

x

same as force on the straight wire between

b

the same two points when they carry the

same current from a to b and are placed in

the same magnetic field. Also find the force.

a

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-M-29

LEVEL II

from a copper wire having cross-sectional area 2.5 10-6 A A

2 i

meter . The framework can turn about a horizontal axis AA, i

magnetic field. If on passing a current of 16 amp, through the

wire, the framework deflects through an angle = 20o, then K i

what is the value of magnetic induction? Given that density of L

K L

copper = 8.9 gm/c.c.

x

2. The magnetic field existing in a region is given by B Bo 1 k . A square

l

loop of edge and carrying a current i, is placed with its edges parallel to the

X-Y axes. Find the magnitude of the net magnetic force experienced by the loop.

carries a current i. (a) Find the magnetic field B at the centre of the polygon. (b)

By letting n , deduce the expression of the magnetic field at the centre of a

circular current.

y

4. A wire loop carrying a current I is placed in the x-y plane as M

shown in the figure. a v x

o

I R +Q

the centre P and given a velocity v along NP, find its P

o

30

instantaneous acceleration.

(b) If an external uniform magnetic induction field B B i N

is applied, find the force and the torque acting on the

loop due to this field.

x

to the plane of the paper. The wire A carries a current of 9.6A,

1.6m

directed into the plane of the paper. The wire B carries a current 2m

S

distance of (10/11) m from the wire B, is zero. Find B

1.2m

(b) the magnitude of the magnetic field induction at the point S, P

(c) the force per unit length on the wire B.

d

I = 10 A is passed in the wire. Find the magnetic

induction at a point P lying on the perpendicular to O

the wire at O at a distance d = 35 cm.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-M-30

q

p

placed with its sides parallel to a long current-carrying wire.

The currents i1 and i2 in the wire and loop are 20 A and 16 A a

i2

respectively.

If a = 15 cm, b = 6 cm and d = 4 cm, what will be the force

s r

on current-loop pqrs? What will be the difference in the d b

force, if the current i2 in the loop becomes clockwise instead

of anticlockwise?

y

8. A current i = 5 amp flows through a thin wire as shown in

D

the figure. C

G 10cm

O in the figure. F O A

x

B 14 i 14 j T, calculate the torque acting on the wire. H I

i2=IA

and I A in the same direction (directed into i2=2.5A

x

R v

x x

plane of the paper) are held at P and Q

respectively such that they are perpendicular to r2=2m

the plane of paper. The points P and Q are r1=5m B

located at distance of 5 meters and 2 meters

respectively from a collinear point R.

(a) An electron moving with a velocity of 4 105 m/s along the positive x-

direction experiences a force of magnitude 3.2 10-20 N at the point R. Find

the value of I.

(b) Find all the positions at which a third long parallel wire carrying a current of

magnitude 2.5 amperes may be placed so that magnetic induction at R is zero.

(2)

y

R (1)

cuboidal spaces (1), (2) and (3). Space 1 V

Q

0

O x

and 3 contain electric field E as shown 90 P

(3)

particle of charge q and mass m is

E

projected as shown with velocity V0cos i +

R

V0 sin j .

Find the value of E, so that this particle enters the magnetic field parallel to the x-

axis and just passes through point P along the electric field at that point. Find its

speed at P. (Neglect the effect of gravity)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-M-31

9. Objective Problems

LEVEL I

1. Two thin long parallel wires separated by a distance b are carrying a current i

amp each. The magnitude of the force per unit length exerted by one wire on the

other is:

(A) 0(i2/b2) (B) 0i2/2 b

(C) 0i/2 b (D) 0i/4 b

a long straight wire such that the wire is parallel to

one of the sides of the loop and is in the plane of the

loop. If a steady current I is established in the wire as I

shown in the figure, the loop will:

(A) rotate about an axis parallel to the wire (B) move away from the wire

(C) move towards the wire (D) remain stationary

5 cm

3. The resulting magnetic field at the point O due w x

5 cm

(A) points out of the page

u v O z

(B) points into the page 10A O y 10A

(C) is zero

(D) is the same as due to the segment WX along.

magnetic field as shown in figure. The path

V

of the particle inside the field is shown by

dark line.

The particle is:

(A) electrically neutral

(B) positively charged

(C) negatively charged

(D) information given is inadequate

point O?

r O

I I 0I

(A) 0 (B) 0

4 r 4r 2 r

I 0I I 0I

(C) 0 (D) 0

4r 4 r 4r 4 r

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-M-32

produces a magnetic field of 14 wb/m2 at the proton, then its angular velocity will

be about

(A) 8.75 1016 rad/s (B) 1010 rad/s

(C) 4 10 15 rad/s (D) 1015 rad/s

the region of space having a uniform, perpendicular magnetic induction field B.

The radius of the path of the electrons inside the magnetic field is:

1 mV 1 2mV

(A) (B)

B e B e

V 1 V

(C) (D)

B B e

8. Two long parallel wires carry currents i2 and i2 (i1 > i2) when the currents are in

opposite direction, the magnetic field at a point midway between the wires is

30 T. If the direction of i2 is changed, the field becomes 10 T. The ratio i1/i2 is

(A) 1 (B) 3

(C) 2 (D) 4

shape as shown in figure. It carries a current I A. r

and the radius of circular loop is r metre. Then the O

magnetic induction at the centre of the circular

loop is:

(A) 0 (B)

i i

(C) 0 ( 1) (D) 0 ( 1)

2 r 2 r

10. A charged particle is released from rest in a region of steady and uniform electric

and magnetic fields which are parallel to each other. The particle will move in a

(A) straight line (B) circle

(C) helix (D) cycloid

C

11. A conductor of mass m and length , carrying current

i (direction as shown in the figure) is placed on

B

smooth inclined making angle with horizontal. A

magnetic field B is directed vertically upwards. Then

for equilibrium of conductor tan is given by

2mg mg

(A) (B)

Bi Bi

mg Bi

(C) (D)

2Bi mg

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-M-33

r

side carrying a current i is

3 0I I O

(A) (B) 0

4

I

(C) 0

(D) zero

3

current I2, as shown in the figure. The force on AB has

magnitude is I1

I2

II II A B

(A) 0 1 2 log(2) (B) 0 1 2 log(3) L

2 2 L/2

3 0I1I2 2 0I1I2

(C) (D) X

2 3

figure. The radius of the curved part of the wire is r. The

field at the centre O of the coil is : O

i 0

(A) 0 (B) 0 90

4 r 2 r

A B

i i

(C) 0 (D) 0 (3 +4)

2 r 8 r

15. A particle of mass m and charge q moves with a constant velocity v along the

positive x direction. It enters a region containing a uniform magnetic field B

directed along the negative z direction, extending from x = a to x = b. The

minimum value of v required so that the particle can just enter the region x>b is

qbB qb a B

(A) (B)

m m

qaB q b a B

(C) (D)

m 2m

position (X Y plane) on a table as shown in figure. A

uniform magnetic field B is applied parallel to x-axis. The I

current I in the loop, so that its one edge just lifts from the

O x

table, is:

r

(A) mg/ r2 B (B) mg/ rB

(C) mg/2 rB (D) rB/mg

17. In figure there exists uniform magnetic field B into the plane of paper. Wire CD is in the

shape of an arc and is fixed. OA and OB are the wires rotating with angular velocity as

shown in figure in the same plane as that of the arc about point O. If at some instant

OA = OB = and each wire makes angle = 30 with yaxis, the current through

resistance R is (wires OA and OB have no resistance)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-M-34

D C

y

B R A

B

30 30

O

2

B

(A) Zero (B)

R

2

B B 2

(C) (D) .

2R 4R

i 1 1

(A) zero (B) 0 R2 R1

4 R1 R 2

S R O Q P

0i 1 1 0i 1 1

(C) (D)

4 R2 R1 2 R1 R2

infinite straight wire as shown in the figure carrying a current i is: r P

(A) 0 (B) 0 i/ 2 2 r i r

i

(C) ( 0 i/ 2 r) (D) 0 2 2

4 r

angle o at centre, as shown in figure is carrying a current i. The

O

magnetic field at O is:

r

i i

(A) 0 (B) 0 ( / 180 )

2r 2r

i

(C) 0 ( / 360) (D) zero

2r

LEVEL II

Y E

the influence of a uniform electric field E i and a P V B

a

to Q as shown in figure. The velocities at P and Q

are V i and 2V j respectively. Which of the Q

2a

following statement(s) is/are correct? 2V

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-M-35

3 mv 2

(A) E

4 qa

3 mv 3

(B) Rate of work done by electric field at P is

4 a

(C) Rate of work done by electric field at P is zero

(D) Rate of work done by both the fields at Q is zero.

2. A long, straight wire carries a current along the Z-axis. One can find two points in the X-

Y plane such that

(A) the magnetic fields are equal

(B) the directions of the magnetic fields are the same

(C) the magnitudes of the magnetic fields are equal

(D) the field at one point is opposite to that at the other point.

3. A long striaght wire of radius r carries a current distributed uniformly over its cross-

section. The magnitude of the magnetic field is

(A) maximum at the axis of the wire (B) minimum at the axis of the wire

(C) maximum at the surface of the wire (D) minimum at the surfae of the wire

4. A charged particle of mass 2 kg and charge 2 C moves with a velocity v 8i 6j m/s in

a magnetic field B 2k T. Then

(A) The path of particle may be x2 + y2 = 25.

(B) The path of particle may be x2 + z2 = 25.

(C) The time period of particle will be 3.14 s.

(D) None of these.

which each small square has side a. The structure is kept in G D

A

uniform magnetic field B.

(A) The magnetic force on the structure is 2 2 iBa . E F

O

(B) The potential of point B = potential of point D. a

(C) Potential of point O = potential of point B. B

i

H C

(D) The magnetic force on the structure is 2 iBa . a

6. A charged particle moves in a uniform magnetic field. The velocity of the particle at some

instant makes an acute angle with the magnetic field. The path of the particle will be

(A) a circle (B) a helix with uniform pitch

(C) a helix with non uniform radius (D) a helix with uniform radius

7. A striaght conductor carries a current along the x-axis. Consider the pionts A(0, a, 0),

B(0, 0, a), C(0, a, 0) and D (0, 0, a). Then

(A) all four points have magnetic fields in different directions

(B) the magnetic fields at A and C are in opposite direction

(C) the magnetic fields at A and B are mutually perpendicular

(D) all four points have same value of magnetic field in magnitude

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-M-36

8. Select the correct alternative(s) : Two ions of equal masses, one singly-ionised and the

other doubly-ionised, are projected from the same point with the same velocity

perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field. Then

(A) both ions will describe circles of equal radii

(B) the singly-ionised one will describe a circle of radius double than that of the order

(C) the two circles do not touch each other

(D) the two circles touch each other

9. Two circular coils A and B with their centers lying on the same number of turns and cary

equal currents in the same sense. They are separated by a distance, have different

diameters but subtend same angle at a point P lying on their common axis. The coil B

lies exactly midway between coil A and the point P. The magnetic field at point P due to

coils A and B is B1 and B2 respectively

(A) B1 > B2 (B) B1 < B2

B1 B 1

(C) 2 (D) 1

B2 B2 2

10. When a currentcarrying coil is placed in a uniform magnetic field with its magnetic

moment antiparallel to the field.

(A) Torque on it is maximum (B) Torque on it is zero

(C) Potential energy is maximum (D) Dipole is in unstable equilibrium.

COMPREHENSION

If there is a moving charged particle nearby this loop, a v

the charged particle will experience a magnetic force x

given by Fm q(v B) . I +Q

P

If now a current carrying loop is placed in a uniform

magnetic field B , the loop experiences a torque given N

by I(A B) .

A wire loop carrying a current I is placed in the x-y plane as shown in figure.

(A) and into the plane (B) and outward to the plane

(C) parallel to the plane (D) none

2. If a particle with charge +Q and mass m is placed at the centre P and given a velocity v

along NP, the instantaneous acceleration of particle is

0.109 0IQv 109 0IQv

(A) (B)

ma ma

10.9 0IQv 1.09 0IQv

(C) (D)

ma ma

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-M-37

3. If an external uniform magnetic induction field B B i is applied, the torque acting on the

loop due to field is

(A) 0.6136 a2IB (B) 6.136 a2IB

2

(C) 61.36 a IB (D) 613.6 a2IB

II.

Statement :

Magnetic force on a charged particle is given by Fm q(v B) and electrostatic force

Fe qE .

Question:

A particle having charge q = 1C and mass m = 1 kg is released from rest at origin. There

are electric and magnetic fields given by :

N

E (10i ) for x 1.8m and

C

B ( 5k)T for 1.8 m x 2.4m

A screen is placed parallel to yz plane at x = 3.0 m. Neglect gravity forces.

4. The speed with which the particle will collided the screen (in m/s) is

(A) 3 (B) 6

(C) 9 (D) 12

0.6( 3 1) 0.6( 3 1)

(A) (B)

3 3

1.2( 3 1)

(C) 1.2( 3 1) (D)

3

6. Time after which the particle will collide the screen is .. second.

1 1 1

(A) 3 (B) 6 3

5 6 3 5 3

1 1 1

(C) 5 (D) 6 3

3 6 3 3 18

1. Match the Following :

Column I Column II

2

(A) Unit of magnetic field (p) Am

(B) Unit of magnetic permeability ( 0) (q) N/Am

(C) Unit of magnetic flux ( ) (r) N/A2

(D) Unit of magnetic dipole moment (s) Nm/A

Column I Column II

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-M-38

(A) A light conducting circular flexible loop (p) Magnetic field B is doubled.

of wire of radius r carrying current I is

placed in uniform magnetic field B, the

tension in the loop is doubled if

(B) Magnetic field at a point due to a long (q) Inductance is increased by four

straight current carrying wire at a point times.

near the wire is doubled if

(C) The energy stored in the inductor will (r) Current I is doubled.

become four times

(D) The force acting on a moving charge, (s) Radius r is doubled.

moving in a constant magnetic field will

be doubled if

Column I Column II

(A) (p) B

O x

(perpendicular

to wire) x

Straight current

carrying wire

(B) (q) B

x

O (axis of wire)

Circular current x

carrying wire

(C) (r) B

x

O (perpendicular to the x

i plane of the wires;

O being equidistant)

i

Parallel current carrying

wires in the same plane

(D) (s) B

i

x

(parallel to one

i of the wires) x

carrying wires in the same plane

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-M-39

LEVEL- I

1. Draw a diagram showing the position of the point where the field is to be

determined in relation to the wires.

2. Find the time period of revolution of the proton, and then find the pitch by

multiplying by v|| to B field. Use v = r to find the radius of the helix.

4. Use the expression for B for a circular coil.

5. The proton moves along a circular path ; write Newtons law for this motion.

6. Use the equation for magnetic field due to a circular arc at the centre. Field due

to both the segments are directed inward.

7. Force on a current element i in magnetic field B is F i B . Resolve the

tension radially and equate with F.

9. Find the field at the centre O due to circular part and straight part. Both the fields

add up, being in the same direction (outward).

10. Find the force acting on a small element on then resolve it ab and ot it. Then

add separately for the whole wire.

LEVEL- II

1. Calculate the magnetic force acting on the horizontal section of the wire, the

torque due to the magnetic force balances the torque due to gravity.

2. The magnetic force on all the four sections should be calculated by integration

and then find the vector sum.

3. The B-field at the centre of the polygon is the sum of the fields due to each

individual side.

4. (a) The B - field is calculated at P and then the force is calculated by using

F Q( v B ).

(b) The torque is non-zero and calculated from the expression B , where

iA .

5. The current in B is found by using the condition that the net field at P is zero.

6. Find the filed at P due to two mutual perpendicular portions separately and then

add them vectorically.

7. Forces on ps and qr are unequal and oppositely directed whereas that on pq and

rs are equal and opposite.

9. Apply the equations for magnetic field B due to straight current. Use the Lorentz

force F q( v B) where q = - 1.6 x 10-19 C.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-M-40

LEVEL I

2. 1.205 10 2 m, 4.4 10 2 m

3. 3.33 mm

4. (a) 2.09 10-4 T (b) 4.5 10-5 T

5. (a) circular motion (b) 1.83 x 107 Hz, 2.76 x 10-12 J.

0i 2 0i 1 3

6. ,

4 R2 R1 8 R2 R1

7. 0.125 N

8. 2.0 10 5 N

i

9. tan

2 R

10. F = Bi

LEVEL II

3

1. 99 10 T

2. iB0 i

n2 i 0 i

3. (a) 0

tan sin (b)

2 2r n n 2r

4. (a) at an angle 300 to ve x-axis (b) , 0.614 a2 IB

ma a

130

5. (a) 3 A (b) T (c) 2. 88 10-6 N/m

4

6. B=4 10 6 T, = 45 to the horizontal.

4

7. 1.44 10 N.

8. (a) 22.78 T in the direction k (b) 6.7 j i N-m

9. (a)4 A (b)x = 1 m w.r.t R

mV0 2 sin2

10. , V0 cos

2qL

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-M-41

LEVEL - I

1. (B) 1. (D)

2. (C) 2. (A)

3. (B) 3. (B)

4. (A) 4. (D)

5. (C) 5. (C)

6. (A) 6. (B)

7. (B) 7. (B)

8. (C) 8. (B)

9. (D) 9. (D)

10. (A) 10. (C)

LEVEL - II

3. (B), (C) 4. (A), (C)

5. (A), (B), (C) 6. (B), (D)

7. (A), (B), (C), (D) 8. (B), (D)

9. (B), (D) 10. (B), (C), (D)

COMPREHENSION

1. (A) 2. (A)

3. (A) 4. (B)

5. (D) 6. (A)

MATCH THE FOLLOWING

1. (A) (q); (B) (r); (C) (s); (D) (p)

2. (A) (p), (r), (s); (B) (r); (C) (q), (r); (D) (p)

3. (A) (s); (B) (q); (C) (p); (D) (r)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P5-PH-EMI-25

ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION

9. Assignment (Subjective Problems)

LEVEL I

the rate of 320 W when a current of 4A is passed through it. Find the time

constant of the circuit when this coil is joined across an ideal battery.

2. It is desired to set up an undriven L-C circuit in which the capacitor is originally

charged to potential difference of 100.0 V. The maximum current is to be 1.0 A, and

the oscillation frequency is to be 1000 Hz. What are the required values of L and C?

3. A circular ring of diameter 20 cm has a resistance of 0.01 . How much charge

will flow through the ring if it is turned from a position perpendicular to a uniform

magnetic field of 2.0 T to a position parallel to the field?

8.4 10 3H

4. A coil of inductance 8.4 10 3 H and a resistance of 6

figure. Switch is closed at t = 0. At what time is the

magnetic energy in the coil 4.2 10 3Joule? K

12V

battery of emf 5.0 V. Find the rate of change of the induced emf at t = 0.

6. An inductor-coil carries a steady-state current of 2.0 A when connected across

an ideal battery of emf 4.0 V. If its inductance is 1.0 H, find the time constant of

the circuit.

7. An average emf of 20 V is induced in an inductor when the current in it is

changed from 2.5 A in one direction to the same value in the opposite direction in

0.1 s. Find the self-inductance of the inductor.

parallel, conducting rails placed at a x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

separation . A magnetic field B exists in a x xR x x x x x x x x x x x l x x

direction perpendicular to the plane of the x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

rails. What force is necessary to keep the x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

wire moving at a constant velocity v?

9. A semicircular copper rod of radius R rotates about an axis passing through one

of its ends and lying in the plane of the rod with an angular speed in a uniform

magnetic field B. Find the emf developed between the two ends of the rod. The

field is perpendicular to the motion of the rod.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P5-PH-EMI-26

10. A square-shaped copper coil has edges of length 50 cm and contains 50 turns. It

is placed perpendicular to an extended uniform magnetic field of strength 1.0 T

magnetic field. It is rotated in the magnetic field about one of its diagonal with

time period 0.25 s. Find the magnitude of the value of maximum emf induced in

the loop.

LEVEL II

velocity in a conducting shaped rail as shown in the figure.

Inward magnetic field of induction B is present inside the X

area bounded by the bar & the rail. Find the external power v

delivered in moving the rail with constant velocity v at time t

(A = area of cross section of the bar, = resistivity of the bar)

of emf . Find the time elapsed before

(a) the current reaches half its maximum values,

(b) the magnetic field energy stored in the circuit reaches half its maximum value.

3. A long solenoid that has 800 turns per meter carries a current i = 3 sin (400t) A.

Find the electric field inside the solenoid at a distance 2 mm from the solenoid

axis. Consider only the field tangential to a circle having its center on the axis of

the solenoid.

rotate about one of its ends over a smooth, rigid

circular metallic frame of radius in an inward O

magnetic field of induction B. What torque should be B

X

applied by an external agent to rotate the rod with

constant angular velocity ?

x

released from rest. It starts sliding due to the current R

drawn from a battery of emf , in a steady inward magnetic m

field. Find the variation of its speed with time. Also find the

terminal speed of the bar.

capacitance 5 F & resulting L-C circuit is set oscillating at its natural frequency.

The maximum charge q is 200 C on the capacitor. Find the potential difference

across the inductor, when the charge is 100 C.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P5-PH-EMI-27

Find the heat developed in the outer

coil between t = 0 and t seconds. The a

resistance of the inner coil is R and

take b >> a.

with a cell of emf through a key k. If key k k

is closed find the current drawn by the R

2R

battery

(a) just after the key k is closed

R

(b) long after the key k is closed L

9. A very small circular loop of area 5 10 -4 m2, resistance 2 ohm and negligible

self inductance initially coplaner and concentric with a much larger fixed circular

loop of radius 0.1 m. A constant current of 1.0 A is passed through the bigger

loop. The smaller loop is rotated with constant angular velocity rad/sec about

its diameter. Calculate the (a) induced emf and (b) the induced current through

the smaller loop as a function of time.

x x x x x x x x

angle ( = /4) having a resistance R is free to x x x x x x x x

rotate about an axis passing through point O x x x x x x x x

O

and perpendicular to horizontal plane. A vertical

magnetic field B = B0 k exists in the space. If

the sector rotates with constant angular velocity

so that Q Joules of heat is produced per

revolution, find the constant angular velocity.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P5-PH-EMI-28

LEVEL - I

1. An inductor coil of inductance L is divided into two equal parts and both parts are

connected in parallel. The net inductance is :

(A) L (B) 2L

(C) L/2 (D) L/4

the current changes by 5 ampere in 0.1 second. The coefficient of mutual

induction between the two coils will be :

(A) 1 Henry (B) 0.1 Henry

(C) 0.1 millihenry (D) 0.001 millihenry

A

3. In figure when key is pressed the ammeter A reads i

ampere. The charge passing in the galvanometer circuit i

of total resistance R is Q. The mutual inductance of the

G

two coils is : C1

C2

(A) Q/R (B) QR

(C) QR/i (D) i/QR

2H

4. The equivalent inductance between points P and

Q in figure is : 2/3H

P

(A) 2 H (B) 6 H

(C) 8/3 H (D) 4/9 H

4H

perpendicular to its plane passing through its centre in a magnetic field of

induction B acting perpendicular to the plane of the disc. The induced e.m.f.

between the rim and axis of the disc is:

2B 2R 2

(A) B R2 (B)

BR 2

(C) B R2 (D)

2

S i3

E = 10 volts, R1 = 2 ohms, R2 = 3 ohms, R3 = 6 ohms

and L = 5 henry. The current i1 just after pressing the E R2 L

switch S is :

(A) 2.5 amp (B) 2 amp

(C) 5/6 amp (D) 5/3 amp

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P5-PH-EMI-29

straight wire carrying a current as shown in figure. Which of s r

the following statements is correct?

i

(A) There is no induced current in coil pqrs

p q

(B) The induced current in coil pqrs is in the clockwise sense

(C) The induced current in the coil pqrs is in anticlockwise

direction

(D) None of the above

respectively.

(A) 0, 0 Amp. (B) 1, 0 Amp. C=2 F 10

(C) 0, 1 Amp. (D) 1, 1 Amp.

S 10 V

parallel to each other. A clockwise current flows in the

loop X as viewed from X towards Y. The two coils will

repel each other, if the current in the loop X is : X Y

(C) constant (D) none of the above cases

10. A coil of area 500 cm2 having 1000 turns is placed such that the plane of the coil

is perpendicular to a magnetic field of magnitude 4 10 5 weber/m2. If it is

rotated by 180 about an axis passing through one of its diameter in 0.1 sec, find

the average induced emf.

(A) zero. (B) 30 mV

(C) 40 mV (D) 50 mV

B shown in figure, the emf across its ends when it x x

x

rotates with angular velocity ' ' about an axis through

one of its ends O and normal to its plane will be x x

O

(A) 2 B 2 (B) B 2 x

1 x

(C) B 2 (D) 4 B 2

2

The current in the coil is 1.0 A approximately after time

(A) 500 ms (B) 20 s

(C) 35 ms (D) 1 ms

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P5-PH-EMI-30

circular region of radius a and is directed into the plane of

x x

the paper, as shown. The magnitude of the induced

x ax P

electric field at point P at a distance r from the centre of x

the circular region is

(C) proportional to 1/ r (D) proportional to 1/r2

resistance 2 is moving on

frictionless rails with a constant R

R=4

velocity of 5 cm/s in a magnetic R

v=5 cm/sec R

field of intensity 3 tesla as shown R

below. If conductor is connected B

to a circuit as shown, by two lead

wires of almost negligible

resistance, then current flowing

in it is

(A) 0.25 A (B) 2.5 Amp

(C) 2.5 mA (D) 0.25 10 4 amp

R

15. A wire cd of length , mass m, is sliding without friction on

a b

conducting rails ax and by as shown in figure. The vertical <

rails are connected to one another via an external <

resistance R. The entire circuit is placed in a region of space c d

of circuit & directed outwards. The steady speed of rod cd is

y

(A) mg R/B (B) mg R/B2 2 x

2

(C) mg R/B (D) mg R/B2

16. A thin circular-conducting ring having N turns of radius R is

falling with its plane vertical in a horizontal magnetic field

B

B. At the position MNQ, the speed of ring is v, the induced

e.m.f. developed across the ring is N

v

(A) Zero

M Q

BV R 2N

(B) and M is at higher potential

2

(C) N BRv and Q is at higher potential

(D) 2RBvN and Q is at lower potential

magnetic field of strength 2 T directed

perpendicular to the plane of loop. Resistance 1 m/s

of the loop wire is 2/ /m. A conductor of

length 2 m is sliding with a speed 1 m/s as

shown in the figure. Find the instantaneous B

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P5-PH-EMI-31

has negligible resistance]

(A) 8 N (B) 16 N

(C) 32 N (D) 64 N

18. Two coils A and B have 200 and 400 turns respectively. A current of 1 A in coil A

causes a flux per turn of 10 3 Wb to link with A and a flux per turn of 0.8 10 3

Wb through B. The ratio of self-inductance of A and the mutual inductance of A

and B is :

(A) 5/4 (B) 1/1.6

(C) 1.6 (D) 1

19. A uniform conducting rod of mass M and length oscillates in a vertical plane

about a fixed horizontal axis passing through its one end with angular amplitude .

There exists a constant and uniform horizontal magnetic field of induction B

perpendicular to the plane of oscillation. The maximum e.m.f. induced in the rod is

B B

(A) 27 3 g 1 cos (B) 27 3 g 1 cos

8 8

3 3 g 1 cos 3 3 g 1 cos

(C) B (D) B

4 4

a long straight wire carrying a current I. If the ends of the rod

from the wire are at distances a and b, then the e.m.f. induced

in the rod is I

i(wa) b i(wb) b a

(A) 0 ln (B) 0 ln

2 a 2 a b

0 iw(a b) b

(C) zero (D) ln

4 a

21. The time required for a current to attain the maximum value in a d.c. circuit

containing L and R, depends upon :

(A) R only (B) L only

(C) L/R (D) none of these

20

22. Consider the shown arrangement. When key k is

pressed, the steady value of current in 20 L=0.2H

resistance is :

(A) 0.1 A (B) 0.25 A

30

(C) 0.017 A (D) zero

V=5V K

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P5-PH-EMI-32

B

23. The resistances P, Q, R and S in the bridge shown are

adjusted such that the deflection in the galvanometer G P Q

K2

(A) first K2 is inserted and then K1 S

L

(C) K1 and K2 are both inserted but an additional D

resistance is put in the arm BD

(D) in all the above cases

K1

own plane with constant angular velocity about one l

L

of its ends P, in a uniform magnetic field B (directed

Q

normally into the plane of paper)then magnitude of P

emf induced across it will be

1

(A) B L2 l 2 (B) B L2

2

1 1

(C) B L2 l 2 (D) B l 2

2 2

points P and Q in the figure is 6H

8H

(A) 9 H P Q

2H 4H

(B) (24/13) H

(C) (12/13) H

(D) 12 H

LEVEL II

(A) weber / ampere (B) volt second / ampere

(C) joule / ampere 2 (D) ohm second

2. Two different coils have self-inductance L1 = 8 mH, L2 = 2mH. The current in one coil is

increased at a constant rate. The current in the second coil is also increased at the same

constant rate. At a certain instant of time, the power given to the two coils is the same.

At that time the current, the induced voltage and the energy stored in the first coils are i1

V1 and W 1 respectively. Corresponding values for the second coil at that instant rate i 2,

V2 and w2 respectively. Then :

i 1 i

(A) 1 (B) 1 4

i2 4 i2

w2 V 1

(C) 4 (D) 2

w1 V1 4

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P5-PH-EMI-33

3. The magnetic flux linked with a conducting coil depends on time as = 4tn + 6, where

n is positive constant. The induced emf in the coil is e

(A) If 0 < n < 1; e 0 and |e| decreases with time.

(B) If n = 1; e is constant.

(C) If n > 1; |e| increases with time.

(D) If n > 1; |e| decreases with time.

placed in the plane of paper in a uniform magnetic field B0.

If the ring is rotating about in the plane of paper about an r

axis passing through point O and perpendicular to the C B

plane of paper with constant angular speed in clockwise

direction.

(A) Point A will be at higher potential than O.

(B) The potential of point B and C will be same. O

(C) The current in ring will be zero.

2B0 .r 2

(D) The current in the ring will be .

R

+ +

of radius 4 m. An equilateral triangular conducting loop is + +

+ + O+

placed in the magnetic field with its centroide on the axis of + + ++

+

the field and its plane perpendicular to the field. B + + + C

(A) e.m.f. induced in any one rod is 16 V + +

(C) e.m.f. induced in the complete ABC is 48 V

(D) e.m.f. induced in any one rod is 16 3 V

path as shown in figure. Which of the following statements is/are

correct

(B) Magnitude of velocity of electron decreases continuously

(C) Net force on the particle is always perpendicular to its direction of motion

(D) Magnetic force on the electron is always perpendicular to direction of motion

decreases continuously

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P5-PH-EMI-34

7. A small magnet M is allowed to fall through a fixed horizontal conducting ring R. Let g be

the acceleration due to gravity. The acceleration of M will be

M

(B) > g when it is above R and moving towards R

(C) < g when it is below R and moving away from R

(D) > g when it is below R and moving away from R

8. The conductor AD moves to the right in a uniform magnetic field directed into the paper

D

v

B

A

(A) The free electrons in AD will move towards A

(B) D will acquire a positive potential with respect to A

(C) If D and A are joined by a conductor externally, a current will flow from A to D in AD

(D) The current in AD flows from lower to higher potential

9. The loop shown moves with a velocity v in a uniform magnetic field of magnitude B,

directed into the paper. The potential difference between P and Q is e

L

v P

L L/2

B Q

1

(A) e Blv (B) e = Blv

2

(C) P is positive with respect to Q (D) Q is positive with respect to P

10. The magnetic field perpendicular to the plane of a conducting ring of radius r changes at

the rate

dB/dt.

dB

(A) The emf induced in the ring is r 2

dt

dB

(B) The emf induced in the ring is 2 r

dt

(C) The potential difference between diametrically opposite points on the ring is half of

the induced emf

(D) All points on the ring are at the same potential

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P5-PH-EMI-35

COMPREHENSION

inductance L and resistor of resistance R is placed

between two long parallel wires. The two long straight i0cos t R i0cos t

wires have time varying current of magnitude I = I0 cos t

but the direction of current in them are opposite.

a a

3a

1. Total magnetic flux in this loop is

Ia 2 0Ia

(A) 0 ln 2 (B) ln 2

4 0Ia 0Ia

(C) ln2 ln 2 . (D)

2

2. Magnitude of emf in this circuit only due to flux change associated with two long straight

current carrying wires will be

aln 2 I0 2 0 aln 2 I0

(A) 0 sin t (B) sin t

0 aln 2 I0 0 aln 2 I0

(C) cos t (D)

cos t .

2

3. The instantaneous current in the circuit will be

2 0 aln2 I0 2 0aln2 I0

(A) sin( t ) (B) sin( t )

2 2 2

R L R2 2 2

L

0 aln 2 I0 0 aln 2 I0

(C) sin t (D) sin( t ).

R2 2 2

L R2 2 2

L

L

(where tan ).

R

II. A person wants to roll a solid non-conducting y

spherical ball of mass m and radius r on a surface

whose coefficient of static friction is . He placed the

ball on the surface wrapped with n turns of closely i

B

packed conducting coils of negligible mass at the

diameter. By some arrangement he is able to pass a

current i through the coils either in the clockwise

x

direction or in the anti-clockwise direction.

A constant horizontal magnetic field B is present throughout the space as shown in the

figure. (Assume is large enough to help rolling motion)

4. If current i is passed through the coils the maximum torque in the coil is

(A) nir2 B k (B) nir2B j

(C) nir2B j (D) nir2B k

5. Angular acceleration of the ball after it has rotated through an angle ( < 180o), is

5 niB 2 niB

(A) cos (B) cos

7 m 5 m

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P5-PH-EMI-36

7 niB 5 niB

(C) cos (D) cos

5 m 2 m

6. The minimum value of for which the rolling motion is possible, is

14 niB 5 niB

(A) r (B) r

5g m 7g m

7 niB

(C) 0 (D) r

5g m

1. Match the Following :

Column I Column II

(A) LCR circuits (p) Resonant curve will be flattened

(B) Inductor (q) Sharpness indicates sensitivity

(C) More of friction or dampness (r) 1

Have resonant frequency with A

LC

Amax

(D) Radio Tuners characteristic curve (s) Mass

current carrying wire as shown. Match the following

table :

i x-axis

Column I Column II

(A) If current is increased (p) Induced current in the loop is clockwise

(B) If current is decreased (q) Induced current in the loop is

anticlockwise

(C) If wire is moved away from the wire (r) Wire will attract the loop and there will be

maintaining constant current a torque about yaxis

(D) If wire is moved towards the wire (s) Wire will repel the loop and there will be

maintaining constant current no torque about yaxis

3. Match the following :

Column I Column II

(A) If an iron core is inserted in the current (p) Capacitor.

carrying solenoid, the quantities which

increases are

(B) The initial current in the circuit will be (q) Resistance.

zero when a resistance and battery in

series is connected to

(C) In L-C oscillation the maximum energy (r) Magnetic flux.

for an instant will be stored in

(D) A current carrying closed conducting (s) Inductance, inductor.

loop can have

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P5-PH-EMI-37

LEVEL- I

L

1. Time constant =

R

2. Maximum current = q0

Cha n g e of flux

3. Charge flown =

Re sis tan ce

4. First find current at the given time.

5. Find expression for induced emf across the inductor.

6. First find resistance.

di

7. EMF induced = L ; di is charge of current in dt second.

dt

8. Find current through the sliding wire first.

LEVEL- II

1. External power delivered = force on the rod due to magnetic field velocity of

the rod.

2. Use L-R circuit charging equation

r dB dB

3. Electric field = where r = 2mm, = rate of charge of magnetic field.

2 dt dt

4. Considering motion of the rod in horizontal plane only ; first find out current

through the rod, then force on a small element on the rod due to external

magnetic field.

5. Write equation of motion of the rod at any instant.

6. Use an L-C oscillating circuit relation.

7. Find flux enclosed by the smaller loop due to magnetic field of the larger loop.

8. Remember an inductor is an open circuit at t = 0 and shorting at t =

9. Find flux enclosed by the smaller loop due to magnetic field of the larger loop.

10. Induced current will flow while the loop enters in to field and again while it comes

out. There will be no current when the loop is completely in the magnetic field.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P5-PH-EMI-38

LEVEL - I

3. 2 Coulombs. 4. 0.97ms

B2 2 v

7. 0.4 H 8.

R

LEVEL - II

2B 2 Av 3 tan ln2

1. t 2. (a) s (b) ( 50 10 3) ln(0.3) sec

20

B2 4

3. 1.2 10-3 cos 400t v/m 4.

4R

B2 2 t

E E

5. 1 e mR

; 6. 20 V

B B

2 2

4 a4 t3 3

7. 0

2

8. (a) (b)

bR 3 2R 5R

-9

9. (a) Induced emf = AB sin t = 3.14 10 sin t

9

(b) Induced current = 1.57 10 sin t

8QR

10.

B2 4

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-P5-PH-EMI-39

LEVEL - I

1. (D) 2. (C)

3. (C) 4. (A)

5. (D) 6. (B)

7. (B) 8. (D)

9. (A) 10. (C)

11. (B) 12. (D)

13. (C) 14. (C)

15. (B) 16. (D)

17. (B) 18. (B)

19. (C) 20. (C)

21. (D) 22. (D)

23. (A) 24. (C)

25. (A)

LEVEL - II

3. (A), (B), (C) 4. (A), (B), (C)

5. (B), (D) 6. (A), (B), (D)

7. (A), (C) 8. (A), (B), (C), (D)

9. (A), (C) 10. (A), (D)

COMPREHENSION

1. (A) 2. (A)

3. (D) 4. (A)

5. (A) 6. (B)

1. (A) (q), (r); (B) (s); (C) (p); (D) (q)

2. (A) (r), (s); (B) (p), (r); (C) (p), (s); (D) (q), (s)

3. (A) (r), (s); (B) (s); (C) (p), (s); (D) (p), (q), (r), (s)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

c-11-09-2002

ALTERNATING CURRENT

7. Assignment (Subjective Problems)

LEVEL - I

V. Calculate (a) peak and rms value of the voltage (b) average voltage

(c) frequency of AC.

2. Find the maximum value of current when inductance of two henry is connected to

150V, 50 cycle supply?

alternately voltage of frequency 300/2 Hz. Calculate the phase difference

between the voltage and current in the circuit.

source. Calculate the current in the circuit and the phase angle between the

current and the source voltage.

applied to this combination. What is the impedance of the combination?

(a) At what frequency will it have a reactance of 3142 ?

(b) What should be the capacity of a condenser which has the same reactance at

that frequency?

to a 120V, 50Hz a.c. source. Calculate

(a) impedance of the circuit at resonance.

(b) current at resonance.

(c) Resonant frequency.

capacitor of 5 F, a resistance of 10 and an ac source of 50Hz so that the

power factor of the circuit is unity.

with a resistor of 500 . Find the power factor of the circuit and the average

power dissipated.

10. The inductance of a choke-coil is 0.2 henry and its resistance is 0.50 . If a

current of 2.0 ampere (rms value) and frequency 50Hz be passed through it,

what will be the potential difference across its ends?

FIITJEE Ltd. ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 2686 5182, 26965626, 2685 4102, 26515949 Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P4-AC-2

FIITJEE Ltd. ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 2686 5182, 26965626, 2685 4102, 26515949 Fax :26513942

RSM79-PH-P4-AC-3

LEVEL - II

1. When 100Volt D.C. is applied across a coil, a current of one ampere flows

through it, when 100V ac of 50Hz is applied to the same coil, only 0.5amp flows.

Calculate the resistance and inductance of the coil.

capacitance is essential to be put in series with the lamp.

10 F

3. A 10 F capacitor, an inductor and a resistor of L

100 are connected to an alternating source of 100

emf 200 2 sin100t as shown in the figure. What

is the r.m.s current in the circuit and the value of

the inductance if the current and the source

voltage attain their maxima simultaneously?

What is the average power consumed in this 200 2 sin100t

case?

alternating current of 50KHz, what should be the value of an inductance required

to be connected in series so that impedance is minimum?

120V - 60Hz line. A voltmeter reads 36V across the resistance. Find the voltage

across the coil and inductance of the coil.

series. The current registered is I. If now the frequency of source is changed to

( but maintaining the same voltage), the current in the circuit is found to be

3

halved. Calculate the ratio of reactance to resistance at the original frequency .

through 10K resistor and a 0.50 F capacitor in series. Find the r.m.s. voltage

across the capacitor and impedance of the circuit?

0.1803 H and a capacitance of 10 F all in series. Calculate the time in which the

resistance (thermal capacity 2 J/ C) will get heated by 10 C. (Ignore radiation)

connected to alternating power source of angular

frequency of 2 rad/s. Box has power factor 1 2 and

circuit has overall power factor 1. Find the impedance of

the box. ~

FIITJEE Ltd. ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 2686 5182, 26965626, 2685 4102, 26515949 Fax :26513942

RSM79-PH-P4-AC-4

between A and B is 0.5 and over all R L

power factor of the circuit is 1. Find V0sin10t

C = 2mF

the value of R and L.

***

FIITJEE Ltd. ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 2686 5182, 26965626, 2685 4102, 26515949 Fax :26513942

RSM79-PH-P4-AC-5

LEVEL - I

1. The frequency for which a 5.0 F capacitor has a reactance of 1000 is given by

1000 100

(A) cycles / sec (B) cycles / sec

(C) 200 cycle /s (D) 5000 cycles /sec

2. In an a.c. circuit V and I are given by V = 50 sin50t volt and I = 100 sin(50t + /3)

mA. The power dissipated in the circuit

(A) 2.5 kW (B) 1.25 kW

(C) 5.0 kW (D) 500 watt

1

(A) 2

(B) 2Li2

2Li

Li2

(C) (D) zero.

4

the correct statement.

(A) current in resistance R and current in

inductor L will be in 90 phase difference. a.c. source

(B) potential drop across R and potential drop across L will be in same phase.

(C) current through C and current through L will be in 90 phase difference.

(D) current in R and current in L will be in same phase.

obtained then net impedance Z will be

I

(A) Z = R (B) Z = L

C

1

(C) Z = L (D) Z =

C

6. An L,C, R series circuit is connected to a.c. source. At resonance, the applied

voltage and the current flowing through the circuit will have a phase difference of

(A) /4 (B) zero.

(C) (D) /2

(A) reactance. (B) admittance.

(C) inductance. (D) conductance.

8. The root-mean-square value of an alternating current of 50Hz frequency is 10

ampere. The time taken by the alternating current in reaching from zero to

maximum value and the peak value of current will be

(A) 2 10 2 sec and 14.14 amp. (B) 1 10 2 sec and 7.07 amp.

(C) 5 10 3 sec and 7.07 amp. (D) 5 10 3 sec and 14.14 amp.

FIITJEE Ltd. ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 2686 5182, 26965626, 2685 4102, 26515949 Fax :26513942

RSM79-PH-P4-AC-6

9. A coil of resistance 2000 and self-inductance 1.0 Henry has been connected to

an a.c. source of frequency 2000/2 Hz. The phase difference between voltage

and current is

(A) 30 (B) 60

(C) 45 (D) 75

10. In a series resonant circuit, the a.c. voltage across resistance R, inductance L

and capacitance C are 5V, 10V and 10V, respectively. The a.c. voltage applied to

the circuit will be

(A) 20V (B) 10V

(C) 5V (D) 25V

voltage at resonant frequency rad/sec?

(A) V1 (B) V2 R L C

(C) V3 (D) V4 V4

E=Eosin t

impedance of the circuit is 10 and R = 6 so, find the power factor of circuit.

(A) 0.4 (B) 0.6

(C) 0.67 (D) 0.9

frequency is less than resonating frequency then net impedance of the circuit will be

(A) capacitive (B) inductive

(C) capacitive or inductive. (D) pure resistive.

14. Using an A.C. voltmeter, the potential difference in the electrical line in a house is

read to be 234 volts. If the line frequency is known to be 50 cycles per second,

the equation for the line voltage is

(A) V = 165 sin(100 t) (B) V = 331 sin(100 t)

(C) V = 234 sin(100 t) (D) V = 440 sin(100 t)

15. In an a.c. circuit, containing an inductance and a capacitor in series, the current

is found to be maximum when the value of inductance is 0.5henry and of

capacitance is 8 F. The angular frequency of the input A.C. Voltage must be

equal to

(A) 500 (B) 5 104

(C) 4000 (D) 5000

capacitor through an a.c. ammeter. The reading of the ammeter shall be

(A) 10mA (B) 20mA

(C) 40mA (D) 80mA

17. In a series R, L, C circuit XL = 10 , XC = 4 and R = 6 . Find the power factor of

the circuit.

FIITJEE Ltd. ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 2686 5182, 26965626, 2685 4102, 26515949 Fax :26513942

RSM79-PH-P4-AC-7

1 3

(A) (B)

2 2

(C) 1/2 (D) none of the these.

18. In LCR circuit the capacitance is changed from C to 4C. For the same resonant

frequency, the inductance should be changed from L to

(A) 2L (B) L/2

(C) L/4 (D) 4L

mF are connected in series to an ac generator

(A) at resonance, the circuit impedance is zero.

(B) at resonance, the circuit impedance is 12 .

(C) the resonance frequency of the circuit is 1/2 .

(D) at resonance, the inductive reactance is less than the capacitive reactance.

20. In an A.C. circuit, the current is I = 5 sin(100 /2) amp and the A.C. potential is V

= 200 sin(100t) volt. Then the power consumption is

(A) 20 watts (B) 40 watts

(C) 1000Watts (D) 0 watts

LEVEL - II

C2 = C/2 and L2 = 2L and third circuit has C3 = 2C and L3 = L/2. All the three capacitors

are charged to the same potential V and then made to oscillate. Then

(A) angular frequency of oscillation is same for al the three circuits

(B) maximum current is greatest in first circuit

(C) maximum current is greatest in second circuit

(D) maximum current is greatest in third circuit.

2. An LCR circuit with 100 resistance is connected to an ac source of 200 V and angular

frequency 300 rad/s. When only the capacitance is removed the current lags behind the

voltage by 60. When only the inductance is removed, the current leads the voltage by

60. Then in LCR circuit the current and power dissipated are :

(A) 2A (B) 1A

(C) 200W (D) 400W.

3. A current of 4A flows in a coil when connected to 12V dc source. If the same coil is

connected to a 12V, 50 rad/s source, a current of 2.4 A flows in the circuit. Then

(A) R = 4 (B) R = 3

(C) L = 4H (D) 0.08 H.

4. In the circuit shown in the figure R = 50 , E1 = 25 3 volt and R

1

E2 = 25 6 sin ( t) volt where = 100 s . The switch is

closed at t = 0 and remains closed for 14 minutes, then it is

opened ~ S

(A) The amount of heat produced in the resistor is 63000 J. 1

2

FIITJEE Ltd. ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 2686 5182, 26965626, 2685 4102, 26515949 Fax :26513942

RSM79-PH-P4-AC-8

(C) If total amount of heat produced is used to heat 3 kg of water at 20C, the final

temperature will be 25C.

(D) The value of direct current that will produce same amount of heat in same time

through same resistor will be 1.5 A.

5. An alternating voltage (in volts) varies with time t (in seconds) as V = 200 sin (100 t)

(a) The peak value of the voltage is 200 V

(b) The rms value of the voltage is 220 V

(c) The rms value of the voltage is 100 2 V

(d) The frequency of the voltage is 50 Hz

(a) The peak value of the voltatge is 100 V

(b) The peak value of the current in the circuit is 2 2 A

(c) The rms value of the voltage is 100 V

(d) The rms value of the current is 2 A

following combinations have the dimensions of frequency ?

(a) R/L (b) 1/RC

(c) R / LC (d) 1/ LC

8. The network shown in figure is part of a circuit. The battery has negligible internal

resistance. At a certain instant the current I = 5 A and is decreasing at a rate of

103 As1. At that instant, the potential difference

E = 15 V L = 5mH

I

A R=1 B

(a) across L is 5 mV (b) across L is 5 V

(c) between points A and B is 15 V (d) between points A and B is 25 V

(a) the voltage VL across the inductance leads the current in the circuit by a

phase angle of / 2

(b) the voltage VC across the capacitance lags behind the current by a phase

angle of / 2

(c) the voltage VR across the resistance is in phase with the current

(d) the votage across the series combination of L, C and R is V = VL + VC + VR.

10. To convert mechanical energy into electrical energy, one can use

(a) DC dynamo (b) AC dynamo

(c) motor (d) transformer

FIITJEE Ltd. ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 2686 5182, 26965626, 2685 4102, 26515949 Fax :26513942

RSM79-PH-P4-AC-9

COMPREHENSION

5mH 10 10V 20 F

S

2

1. The current through 10 resistor at any instant t; 0 < t < will be

1000 1000

1 t 5 t

(A) e 3 (B) e 3

6 6

1000 1000

1 3 t 6 3 t

(C) e (D) e .

6 5

95. The energy stored in the inductor at any instant t; 0 < t < will be

1000 1000

1 t 125 t

(A) (5 5e 3 )2 mJ (B) (1 e 3 )2 mJ

2 2

1000 1000

25 t 5 t

(C) (1 e 3 )2 mJ (D) (1 e 3 )2 mJ .

2 2

96. The energy stored in the capacitor and inductor respectively as t will be

(A) 1 mJ and 62.5 mJ (B) 62.5 mJ and 1 mJ

(C) 2 mJ and 62.5 mJ (D) 1 mJ and 60 mJ.

applied frequency of the AC source of three different LCR

1

circuits having different resistances. The value of

inductance L and capacitance C are same for all the three

2

circuits.

3

(A) R1 > R2 > R3 (B) R1 < R2 < R3

(C) R1 > R2 = R3 (D) R1 = R2 = R3

900 40

98. If R1 = 1 , R2 = 5 , R3 = 10 and L = mH, C = F, then the value of 0 is

(A) 250 Hz (B) 125 Hz

250 250

(C) Hz (D) Hz

6 3

99. In the previous question, the frequency with which energy oscillates between

Electric Field Energy and Magnetic Field Energy, is

1 1

(A) (B)

4 LC LC

1

(C)

2 LC

(D) the energy in the electric field does not oscillate

FIITJEE Ltd. ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 2686 5182, 26965626, 2685 4102, 26515949 Fax :26513942

RSM79-PH-P4-AC-10

Column I Column II

(A) For square wave having peak value v0 (p) v0 > vrms > vav

(B) For sinusoidal wave having peak value v0 (q) In a pure inductance.

(C) Current leads the voltage by /2 (r) vav = vrms = v0

(D) Wattless current (s) In a pure capacitance

Column I Column II

(A) In LR series circuit if switch is closed (p) Current at t = 0 is nonzero

at t = 0 (u sin of DC source)

(B) In LC series combination switch is (q) Nothing can be said about the

closed at t = 0 (if initially the capacitor is current

fully charged

(C) If voltage V=V0 sin t is applied to pure (r) Current in the circuit is zero at t = 0

inductor at t = 0

(D) If voltage V = V0 sin t is applied at t (s) Magnetic field energy in inductor is

= 0 to LCR series circuit zero at t = 0

FIITJEE Ltd. ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 2686 5182, 26965626, 2685 4102, 26515949 Fax :26513942

RSM79-PH-P4-AC-11

LEVEL - I

3

2. A 3. /4

2 2

6. (a) 500Hz. (b) 0.11 F

20

7. (a) 15 (b) 8A (c) 100.7 Hz 8. 2

LEVEL - II

3. 2A, 10H, 400W 4. 0.303 H

3

5. 114V, 0.76H 6.

5

7. 10V, 1.2 104 8. 5.8 min

1

9. 10. 100 , 5H

C 2

***

FIITJEE Ltd. ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 2686 5182, 26965626, 2685 4102, 26515949 Fax :26513942

RSM79-PH-P4-AC-12

LEVEL - I

1. (B) 2. (B)

3. (D) 4. (A)

5. (A) 6. (B)

7. (D) 8. (D)

9. (C) 10. (C)

11. (D) 12. (B)

13. (A) 14. (B)

15. (A) 16. (B)

17. (A) 18. (C)

19. (B) 20. (D)

LEVEL - II

3. (B), (D) 4. (A), (C), (D)

5. (A), (C), (D) 6. (B), (C), (D)

7. (A), (B), (C) 8. (B), (C)

9. (A), (B), (C) 10. (A), (B)

COMPREHENSION

4. (B) 5. (B)

6. (A) 7. (B)

8. (D) 9. (B)

2. (A) (r), (s); (B) (r), (s); (C) (p); (D) (q)

FIITJEE Ltd. ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 2686 5182, 26965626, 2685 4102, 26515949 Fax :26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-GOP-37

OPTICS

8. Assignment (Subjective Problems)

LEVEL I

The magnification factor becomes q when the lens is moved a distance a

towards the object. Find the focal length of the lens.

2. A parallel beam of light is incident normally onto a solid glass sphere of radius R

( = 1.5). Find the distance of the image from the outer edge of the glass sphere.

3. A point object is placed in front of a silvered plano-convex lens of

refractive index n, radius of curvature R, so that its image is O

4. A convex lens focuses a distant object on a screen placed 10 cm away from it. A

glass plate (n = 1.5) of thickness 1.5 is inserted between the lens and the screen.

Where should the object be placed so that its image is again focused on the

screen?

5. A parallel beam of light tavelling in water (refractive index = 4/3) is refracted by a

spherical air bubble of radius 2 mm situated in water. Assuming the light rays to

be paraxial (i) find the position of image due to refraction at first surface and

position of final image. (ii) draw a ray diagram showing the position of both

images.

6. Find the focal length of the lens shown in the 1 < 2 < 3

figure. The radii of curvature of both the surfaces 3

1 2

are equal to R.

R R

a concave mirror of focal length 30 cm. An object is placed 40 cm to the left of

lens. Find the position, nature and magnification of the final image.

8. A cylindrical glass rod has its two coaxial ends of

spherical form bulging outward. The front end has a

radius of curvature 5 cm and the back end which is O P

silvered has a radius of curvature 8 cm. The

50 cm

thickness of the rod along the axis is 10 cm. R = 5 cm R = 8 cm 1 2

at the axis 50 cm from front face (ang = 1.5)

9. A thin bi-convex lens of refractive index 3/2 and radius of curvature 50cm is placed

on a reflecting convex surface of radius of curvature 100cm. A point object is placed

on the principal axis of the system such that its final image coincides with itself. Now

few drops of a transparent liquid is placed between the mirror and lens such that final

image of the object is at infinity. Find refractive index of the liquid used. And also find

position of the object.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-GOP-38

10. An object of height 2.5 cm is placed at a 1.5 f from a concave mirror where f is

the magnitude of the focal length of the mirror. The object is placed perpendicular

to the principal axis. Find the height of the image. Is the image erect or inverted ?

11. In Young's double slit experiment the fringe width obtained is 0.6 cm, when light

of wavelength 4800 A0 is used. If the distance between the screen and the slit is

reduced to half, what should be the wavelength of light used to obtain fringes

0.0045-m width?

12. In a Young's double slit experiment, the slits are 1.5 mm apart. When the slits

are illuminated by a monochromatic light source and the screen is kept 1 m apart

from the slits, width of 10 fringes is measured as 3.93 mm. Calculate the

wavelength of light used. What will be the width of 10 fringes when the distance

between the slits and the screen is increased by 0.5 m. The source of light used

remains the same.

obtain interference fringes in a Youngs double slit experiment. Find the distance

of the third fringe on the screen from the central maximum for the wavelength

6500A.

screen placed at some distance from the slits. If the screen is moved by 5 10-2

m towards the slits, the change in fringe width is 3 10-5 m. If the distance

between the slits is 10-3 m, calculate the wave length of the light used.

15. At a certain point on a screen the path difference for the two interfering rays is

(1/8)th of a wavelength. Find the ratio of the intensity at this point to that at the

centre of a bright fringe.

A

(b) Show that the intensity at P0 is three times the P0

individually.

detector can be moved on the line S1P which is d

perpendicular to S1S2. Find out the position of first P

minimum detected. S1 D

18. White light may be considered to have from 4000 A0 to7500 A0. If an oil film

has thickness 10-6 m, deduce the wavelengths in the visible region for which the

reflection among the normal direction will be (i) weak, (ii) strong. Take of the

oil as 1.40.

19. Find the maximum intensity in case of interference of n identical waves each of

intensity I0 if the interference is (a) coherent (b) incoherent

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-GOP-39

by a distance of 5 10 4 m. The interference pattern is seen on a screen placed

at a distance of 1m from the plane of slits. A thin glass plate of thickness

1.5 10 6 m and refractive index = 1.5 is placed between one of the slits and

screen. Find the intensity at the centre of the screen if the intensity there is I0 in

the absence of the plate. Also find the lateral shift of the central maxima.

LEVEL II

O

tank filled with water. Using the values

given in the figure, calculate the value 36 cm 1m

85 cm

of h, i.e. the water level in the tank.

h

2. (a) The refracting angle of a prism is equal to /2. It is given that is the angle of

minimum deviation and is the deviation of the ray at grazing incidence.

Prove that sin = sin2 and cos = cos

(b) A ray of light passes through a prism, deviation equal to the angle of

incidence which, again, is equal to 2 . It is given that is the angle of prism.

1

Show that cos2 = 2

, where is the refractive index of the material

8 1

of prism.

n1

face. The assembly is in air. A ray is incident on AB.

(i) Calculate the angle of incidence at AB for which the ray n

(ii) Assuming n = 1.352, calculate the angle of incidence at AB

for which the refracted ray passes through the diagonal

face undeviated.

4. Three thin equi-convex lenses each of focal length f are separated by distance

f apart. A point object is placed at a distance of 3f in front of the first lens. Find

the position of the final image.

5. A cylindrical vessel of radius R and height 3a is completely filled

with three different immiscible liquids each of height a and n1 a

having refractive indices n1, n 2 and n3 (where n1>n2>n3)>1. A a

n2

point object is placed at the centre of the bottom of the vessel.

n3 a

The rays just suffer total internal reflection at the edge of the

vessels mouth. Find the radius of curvature of the vessel.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-GOP-40

from a convex lens (focal length 0.2 m) cut into

two halves each of which is displaced by 5 S 0.0005 m

10-4m as shown in the figure. Find the position

of the image. If more than one image is

formed, find their number and the distance L2

two parts are placed at a separation of 5 5 mm 5 mm

x

mm as shown. A concave lens is also (0, 0) 5 mm 5 mm

sense that of convex lens. The focal

lengths of convex and concave lenses are 90 cm 20 cm

co-ordinate(s) of real images when an

object is placed at a distance of 90 cm

from the plane of the convex lens.

L2

are separated by a horizontal distance d (where L1

vertical separation as shown in figure. Taking

O X

the origin of coordinates O, as the centre of first

lens, what would be the x and y coordinates of

the focal point of this lens system, for a parallel d

beam of rays coming from the left ?

mirror of focal length 30cm are kept with their optic B

P

axes PQ and RS parallel but separated in vertical R

0.6

S

Q

the lens and the mirror is 30 cm. An upright object

AB of height 1.2 cm is placed on the optic axis PQ of 30 cm 20 cm

is the image after refraction from the lens and

reflection from the mirror, find the distance of A B

from the pole of the mirror and obtain its

magnification . Also locate positions of A and B with

respect to the optic axis RS.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-GOP-41

10 cm

floats in a transparent liquid of density 2 kept in a beaker. 2 cm

The bottom of the beaker is spherical in shape with its radius

of curvature 8 cm and is silvered to make it a concave mirror h

as shown in the figure. When an object is placed at a

distance of 10 cm directly above the centre of the sphere its

final image coincides with it. Find h (as shown in the figure),

the height of the liquid surface in the beaker from the apex of

the bottom. Consider paraxial rays only. The refractive index

of the sphere is (3/2) and that of the liquid is (4/3).

11. Sodium light has two wavelengths 1 = 589 nm and 2 = 589.6 nm. As the path

difference increases, when is the visibility of the fringes minimum ?

shown in the figure, the two glass plates A and S1

B each of thickness TA = T0 and TB = T0 + t2

(where is constant, t is time in sec) are placed d

S O

in the paths of rays of light coming from S1 and TB = T0+ t2

Screen

S2

S2. Find out the minimum time after which the

central maxima position O will again appear D

[Take = refractive index of glass]

and refractive indices 1.40 & 1.42 are pasted on the

S1

two slits of a double slit aparatus. The separation of O

slits equals 1 mm. Wavelength of light used equals S2

600 nm. The screen S is placed at a distance 1 m from

the plane of the slits. Find the position(s) of first

maxima from the centre O of the screen.

A D

slits S1 and S 2 sealed with identical glass

plates of equal thickness. The distance S1

P

between the slits is 0.8 mm. POQ is the line O

Q

perpendicular to the plane AB and passing S 2

40cm

through O, the middle point of S1 and S2. A

monochromatic light source is kept at S, 40cm 2m 10 cm

S C

below P and 2m from the vessel, to illuminate B

Calculate the position of the central bright fringe on the other wall CD with respect to

the line OQ. Now, a liquid is poured into the vessel and filled up to OQ. The central

bright fringe is found to be at Q. Calculate the refractive index of the liquid.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-GOP-42

P

set up as shown in the figure. The S1S2 part of the set

air

up is put in a medium whose refractive index varies rn

as = 0(1 + x) where x is the displacement from 0

0

S O

(a) Find the nature of fringes obtained on the screen. S1

II

(b) Find the distance of nth bright fringe from the I

mediu

III

m

central fringe on the screen. [take to be small]. d Air Screen

P Q

and also of S1 and S2 sources.

experiment the point source S S 1

P

O

2

figure. 1m 2m

(a) Find the nature and

order of the interference

at the point P.

(b) Find the nature and order of the interference at O.

(c) Where should we place a film of refractive index = 1.5 and what should be

its thickness so that a maxima of zero order is placed at O?

parallel beam of light of wavelength 6000 and intensity (10/ ) W-m-2 is incident

normally on two circular apertures A and B of radii 0.001 m and 0.002 m

respectively. A perfect transparent film of thickness 2000 and refractive index

1.5 for the wavelength of 6000 is placed in front of aperture A (figure).

Calculate the power (in watt) received at the focal spot F of the lens. The lens is

symmetrically placed with respect to the apertures. Assume that 10% of the

power received by each aperture goes in the original direction and is brought to

the focal spot.

between the light source and the two slits is filled = 4/3 S1

Air

with a liquid of refractive index 4/3. Whereas the S

medium between the slits and screen is air. Find Screen

the position of the first bright fringe from the central S2

maxima?

D = 2 m and d = 0.25 mm and medium = 5000A .

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-GOP-43

refractive index 4/3. A light of 600 nm wavelength is falling

on the slits having 0.45 mm separation. The lower slit S2 is S1

covered by a thin glass sheet of thickness 10.4 m and O

refractive index 1.5. the interference pattern is observed S2

on a screen placed 1.5 m from the slits as shown in figure.

(a) Find the location of the central maximum (bright fringe with zero path difference) on

the y-axis.

(b) Find the light intensity at point O relative to the maximum fringe intensity.

(c) Now, if 600 nm light is replaced by white light of range 400 to 700 nm, find the

wavelengths of the light that from maxima exactly at point O.

[All wavelengths in this problem are for the given medium of refractive index 4/3.

Ignore dispersion.]

wavelength ) and screen are placed as

shown in the figure. Now whole of the d

setup is kept in a liquid of medium = S

Wood plate

O

the position of third minima on the screen

in terms of , r, R and .

=4/3

S2 R

r

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-GOP-44

LEVEL I

shown in the adjoining figure, then;

(A) = 2 (B) < 2

(C) > 2 (D) 2

r

then the value of g would be Water r

(A) (4/3)sin(i) (B) [1/sin(i)]

(C) 4/3 (D) 1 Glass i

3. A converging lens is used to form an image on a screen. When the upper half of

the lens is covered by an opaque screen :

(A) half of the image will disappear (B) image will not form on the screen.

(C) intensity of image will increase (D) intensity of image will decrease

4. A spherical convex surface separates object and image space of refractive index

1 and 4/3 respectively. If radius of curvature of the surface is 0.1 m, its power is :

(A) 2.5 D (B) 2.5 D

(C) 3.3 D (D) 3.3 D

5. A ray of light passes through an equilateral prism such that the angle of

incidence is equal to the angle of emergence and latter is equal to 3/4th the angle

of prism. The angle of deviation is :

(A) 45o (B) 39o

o

(C) 20 (D) 30o

deviation is 30o, what is the refractive index of the liquid?

(A) 1.41 (B) 1.50

(C) 1.65 (D) 1.95

7. A prism can produce a minimum deviation in a light beam. If three such prisms

are combined, the minimum deviation that can be produced in this beam is:

(A) 0 (B)

(C) 2 (D) 3

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-GOP-45

in figure. The refracted ray undergoes reflection on

face PR and retraces its path. The refractive index of 45

0

the prism is :

(A) 2 (B) 3/ 2

Q R

(C) 1.5 (D) 1.33

9. A particle moves towards a concave mirror of focal length 30 cm along its axis

and with a constant speed of 4 cm/ sec. What is the speed of its image when the

particle is at 90 cm from the mirror?

(A) 2 cm/ sec. (B) 8 cm/sec.

(C) 1 cm/sec. (D) 4 cm/sec.

10. A thin prism of glass is placed in air and water successively. If a g = 3/2 and

a w = 4/3, then the ratio of deviations produced by the prism for a small angle of

incidence when placed in air and water is :

(A) 9 : 8 (B) 4 : 3

(C) 3 : 4 (D) 4 : 1

11. A thin prism P1 with angle 4o and made from glass of refractive index 1.54 is

combined with another thin prism P2 made from glass of refractive index 1.72 to

produce dispersion without deviation. The angle of the prism P2 is :

(A) 5.33o (B) 4o

(C) 3o (D) 2.6o

12. Focal lengths of two lenses are f and f and dispersive powers of their materials

are and . To form achromatic combination from these, which relation is

correct?

(A) = 0, = 2 0, f = 2f (B) = 0, = 2 0, f = 2f

(C) = 0, = 2 0, f =f/2 (D) = 0, = 2 0, f = f/2.

13. A lens of refractive index is put in a liquid of refractive index . If the focal

length of the lens in air is f, its focal length in liquid will be

f 1 f

(A) (B)

1

1 f

(C) (D)

f

14. A convex lens, a glass slab, a glass prism and a spherical solid ball have been

prepared from the same optically transparent material. Dispersive power will be

possessed by:

(A) the prism only (B) the convex lens and the prism

(C) all except glass slab. (D) all the four

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-GOP-46

15. A beam of white light is incident on a hollow prism of glass as shown in the

figure. Then

(A) The light emerging from prism gives no spectrum

(B) The light emerging from prism gives spectrum but the bending i

of all colours is away from base. White

(C) The light emerging from prism gives spectrum, all the colours light

bend towards base, the violet most and red the least.

(D) The light emerging from prism gives spectrum, all the colours

bend towards base, the violet the least and red the most.

is incident on a right-angled prism. The refractive indices

of the material of prism for the above red, green and blue

wavelengths are 1.39, 1.44 and 1.47 respectively. The

prism will: 45

o

and blue colours

(B) separate part of the blue colour from the red and green colours

(C) separate all the three colours from one another

(D) not separate even partially any colour from the other two colours.

17. A convex lens A of focal length 20 cm and a concave lens B of focal length 5 cm

are kept along the same axis with a distance d between them. If a parallel beam

of light falling on A leaves B as a parallel beam, then the distance d in cm will be:

(A) 25 (B) 15

(C) 10 (D) 30

18. When the distance between the object and the screen is more than 4f, we can

obtain the image of the object on the screen for the two different positions of a

convex lens of focal length f. If I1 and I2 be the sizes of the two images, then the

size of the object is:

(A) (I1 + I2)/2 (B) I1 I2

(C) (I1 I2) (D) (I1/I2)

types of transparent materials indicated by different

shades. A point object is placed on its axis. The object

will form:

(A) 1 image (B) 2 images

(C) 3 images (D) 7 images

20. In the displacement method, a convex lens is placed in between an object and a

screen. If the magnification in the two positions be m1 and m2 and the

displacement of the lens between the two positions is X, then the focal length of

the lens is :

(A) X/(m1 m2) (B) X/|m1 m2 |

(C) X/|m1 + m2 | (D) X/(m1 m2)2

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-GOP-47

21. Two coherent monochromatic light beams of intensities I and 4I are superposed.

The maximum and minimum intensities in the resulting beam are

(A) 5I and I (B) 5I and 3I

(C) 9I and I (D) 9I and 3I

22. In Young's double slit experiment, the fringe width is . If the entire arrangement

is now placed inside a liquid of refractive index , the fringe width will become

(A) (B) /

(C) (D)

1 1

23. In a Young's double slit experiment, let S1 and S2 be the two slits, and C be the

centre of the screen. If S1CS2= and is the wavelength, the fringe width will be

(A) (B)

(C) 2 / (D) /2

24. The speed of light in air is 3 10 8 m/s. If the refractive index of glass is 1.5, find

the time taken by light to travel a distance 50 cm in glass.

(A) 2.5 10 9 sec. (B) 0.5 10 9 sec.

(C) 0.16 10 9 sec. (D) 3 10 9 sec.

25. In the Youngs double slit experiment, films of thickness tA and tB and refractive

indices A and B are placed in front of A and B respectively. If AtA = BtB , the

central maximum will

(A) not shift

(B) shift towards A

(C) shift towards B

(D) option (B), if tB > tA and option (C) if tB < tA

26. In the Youngs double slit experiment both the slits are similar. If the length of

one of the slits is halved, which of the following is true?

(A) Bright fringes becomes narrower. (B) Bright fringes become wider.

(C) Dark fringes become darker. (D) Dark fringes become brighter.

27. Waves from two different sources overlap near a particular point. The amplitude

and the frequency of the two waves are same. The ratio of the intensity when the

two waves arrive in phase to that when they arrive 900 out phase is

(A) 1 : 1 (B) 2 : 1

(C) 2 : 1 (D) 4 : 1

28. Instead of using two slits as in Young's experiment, if we use two separate but

identical sodium lamps, which of the following occur ?

(A) general illumination (B) widely separate interference

(C) very bright maximum (D) very dark minimum

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-GOP-48

29. For best contrast between maxima and minima in the interference pattern of

Young's double slit experiment, the intensity of light emerging out of the two slits

should be

(A) equal (B) double

(C) small (D) large

30. The path difference between two interfering waves at a point on a screen is 11.5

times the wavelength. The point is

(A) dark (B) bright

(C) neither dark nor bright (D) data is inadequate

31. In an interference pattern produced by two identical slits, the intensity at the site

of maxima is I. When one of the slit is closed, the intensity at the same spot is I0.

What is the relation between I and I0

(A) I = 2I0 (B) I = 4I0

(C) I = 16I0 (D) I = I0

32. In a Youngs double slit experiment, the position of first bright fringe coincides

with S1 and S2 respectively on the either side of central maxima. What is the

wavelength of the light used? [Take D = 1m and d = 1.2 mm]

(A) 3600A (B) 5400A

(C) 7200A (D) none of these.

33. In a Young's double slit experiment, if the slits are of unequal width,

(A) fringes will not be formed

(B) the positions of minimum intensity will not be completely dark.

(C) bright fringe will not be formed at the centre of the screen

(D) distance between two consecutive bright fringes will not be equal to the

distance between two consecurive dark fringes.

a distance 'a' produce an interference pattern on the screen. S1

The wave length of the monochromatic light emitted by the

sources is . The maximum number of interference fringes

S2

that can be observed on the screen is nearly equal to

2a a D

(A) +1 (B)

a

(C) (D) 1

a

35. In Young's double slit experiment, we get 60 fringes in the field of view of

monochromatic light of wavelength 4000 A0. If we use monochromatic light of

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-GOP-49

wavelength 6000 A0, then the number of fringes obtained in the same field of

view is

(A) 60 (B) 90

(C) 40 (D) 1.5

36. In Young's double slit experiment, the 7th maximum with wavelength 1 is at a

distance d1 and that with wavelength 2 is at a distance d2 . Then d1/d2 is

(A) 1/ 2 (B) 2 / 1

2 2 2 2

(C) 1/ 2 (D) 2 / 1

37. In a two slit experiment with white light, a white fringe is observed on a screen

kept behind the slits. When the screen is moved away by 0.05 m, this white

fringe

(A) does not move at all

(B) gets displaced from its earlier position

(C) becomes coloured

(D) disappears

38. A source emits electromagnetic waves of wavelength 3m. One beam reaches

the observer directly and other after reflection from a water surface, travelling

1.5m extra distance and with intensity reduced to 1/4 as compared to intensity

due to the direct beam alone. The resultant intensity will be

(A) (1/4) fold (B) (3/4) fold

(C) (5/4) fold (D) (9/4) fold

39. Ratio of intensities of two waves are given by 4 :1. Then the ratio of the

amplitudes of the two waves is

(A) 2 :1 (B) 1 : 2

(C) 4 : 1 (D) 1 : 4

40. In the Young's experiment with sodium light, the slits are 0.589 m apart. What is

the angular width of the fourth maximum ? Given that = 589 nm.

(A) sin-1 (3 10-6) (B) sin -1 (3 10-8)

(C) sin-1 (0.33 10-6) (D) sin-1 (0.33 10-8)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-GOP-50

LEVEL II

1. An image of a bright square is obtained on a screen with the aid of a convergent lens.

The distance between the square and the lens is 40 cm. The area of the image is nine

time larger than that of the square. Select the correct statement(s) :

(A) Image is formed at a distance 120 cm from lens.

(B) Image is formed at a distance 360 cm from lens.

(C) Focal length of lens is 30 cm.

(D) Focal length of lens is 36 cm.

2. In a prism of angle A and refractive index , the maximum deviation occurs when

(A) the angle of incidence is 90

(B) the angle of incidence may be is sin 1 2

1sin A cos A

1

(C) the angle of emergence is sin sin A C

3. A lens of focal length f is placed in between an object and screen at a distance D. The

lens forms two real images of object on the screen for two of its different positions, a

distance x apart. The two real images have magnifications m1 and m2 respectively (m1 >

m2).

x

(A) f (B) m1m2 = 1

m1 m 2

D2 x 2

(C) f (D) D 4f.

4D

4. An interference pattern is formed on the screen, when light from two different

monochromatic sources are allowed to interfere. Then, it is true that,

(A) frequencies of light from the two sources are equal to each other

(B) the sources are coherent

(C) the sources should be located in the same medium

(D) the path difference should either be an even or, an odd multiple of , where is the

2

wavelength of light

5. A thin paper of thickness 0.02 mm having refractive index 1.45 is pasted across one of

the slit in a Youngs double slit experiment. The paper transmits 4/9 of light falling on it.

( light = 600 nm).

(A) Amplitude of light wave transmitted through the paper will be 2/3 time of incident

wave.

(B) The ratio of maximum and minimum intensity in the fringe pattern will be 25.

(C) The total number of fringe crossing the centre if an identical paper is pasted on the

other slit is 15.

(D) The ratio of maximum and minimum intensity in the pattern will be 5.

6. For refraction through a small angled prism, the angle of minimum deviation :

(A) increases with the increases in R.I. of the prism

(B) will be 2D for a ray of R.I. 2.4, if it is D for a ray of R.I. 1.2

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-GOP-51

(D) will decrease with the increase in R.I. of the prism

7. The radius of curvature of the left and right surface of the concave lens are 10 cm and

15 cm respectively. The radius of curvature of the mirror is 15 cm :

Water

Air

(n=4/3)

Glass

(n=3/2)

(A) equivalent focal length of the combination is 18 cm

(B) equivalent focal length of the combination is + 36 cm

(C) the system behaves like a concave mirror

(D) the system behaves like a convex mirror

3

8. A point object is placed at 30 cm from a convex glass lens g of focal length 20

2

cm. The final image of object will be formed at infinity if :

(A) another concave lens of focal length 60 cm is placed in contact with the previous

lens

(B) another convex lens of focal length 60 cm is placed at a distance of 30 cm from the

first lens

(C) the whole system is immersed in a liquid of refractive index 4/3

(D) the whole system is immersed in a liquid of refractive index 9/8

9. The upper portion of lens is painted black in situation as shown in figure. Which of the

following statement(s) is/are correct :

(B) the distribution of brightness of image will not be symmetric

(C) the lower half of image will be brighter than upper half

(D) the upper half of image will be brighter than lower half

screen placed at a distance D. The slits are separated by d and are illuminated by light

of wavelength . The distance from the central point where the intensity falls to half the

maximum is :

D D

(A) (B)

3d 2d

D D

(C) (D)

d 4d

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-GOP-52

COMPREHENSION

refractive index as shown in the figure.

(A) Incident rays are partially reflected at point A.

(B) Incident rays are totally reflected at point A.

(C) Incident rays are totally transmitted through A.

(D) None of these.

emergent ray (angle of deviation) as shown in the figure is

(A) 0 (B)

(C) (D) 4 + 2 . A

3. Consider the figure of question 8, the angle for which minimum deviation is produced

will be given by

2 2

1 1

(A) cos2 (B) cos2

3 3

2 2

1 1

(C) sin2 (D) sin2 .

3 3

plane mirror as shown in the figure. The space between lens and the

mirror is then filled with water of refractive index 4/3.

It is found that when a point object is placed 15 cm above the lens

on the principal axis the object coincides with its own image.

4. At what distance object should be placed before water is filled so that image coincides

with object if R is radius of curvature of lens

(A) 1.5 R (B) R

(C) 2R (D) R/2

5. In the above experiment when water is present, and parallel rays are incident then it will

converge at a distance

(A) 2.25 cm (B) 15 cm

(C) 10 cm (D) 7.5 cm

6. On repeating the above experiment in which water is replaced by a liquid of refractive

index image again coincide at a distance 25 cm from the lens then refraction index of

liquid is

(A) 1.5 (B) 1.4

(C) 1.8 (D) 1.6

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-GOP-53

1. An object located between the focus and the pole of a concave mirror moves towards

the pole with a constant velocity along its principal axis. Consider the image formed by

paraxial rays. Let 0 and I represent the magnitudes (absolute values) of the angles

subtended by the object and its image at the pole of the mirror respectively; and let m be

I

defined as . Use the New Cartesan Sign Convention.

0

Column I Column II

(A) Velocity of image (p) Positive.

(B) Acceleration of image (q) Negative.

(C) d 0 (r) Zero.

, i.e., the rate at which 0

dt

changes with time

(D) dm (s) Changes from positive to negative.

dt

Column I Column II

(A) (p)

1 1 1 1

When sin then deviation in sin

2 2 2

the path of ray is

(B) Maximum deviation in the path of ray (q)

1 1

for refraction at boundary 2 sin

2

for reflection at the boundary

(D) Deviation in the path at grazing angle of (s)

1 1

incidence sin sin

2

3. A plane mirror is tied to the free end of an ideal spring. The Mirror

V

other end of the spring is attached to a wall. The spring with

mirror is held vertically to the floor, can slide along it smoothly.

When the spring is at its natural length, the mirror is found to 2V

be moving at a speed of V with respect to ground frame. An

object is moving towards the mirror with speed 2V with respect

to ground frame. Then, Match the following :

Column I Column II

(A) Speed of image with respect to ground (p) V

frame when spring is at natural length

(B) Speed of image with respect to mirror (q) O

when spring is at natural length

(C) Speed of image with respect to object (r) 2V

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-GOP-54

(D) Speed of image with respect to ground (s) 3V

frame when spring is at maximum

compressed state

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-GOP-55

LEVEL I

apq R ( 2 n)

1. 2.

q p 2 (n 1)

3. R/n 4. 190cm, right of the lens

3R

5. 5 mm from left of 2nd surface 6.

3 1

8. 9.365cm 9. 7/6 and 100 cm

10. 5 cm and inverted 11. 72 10-7 m

17. 1.7 cm

19. n2I0 , nI0 20. Zero, 1.5 mm

LEVEL II

1. h = 20 cm.

3. (i) sin 1 {n sin (450 n1/n)} (ii) i = 72.90

4. -2f from third lens

1 1 1

5. R =a

n12 1 n22 1 n231 1

7. (160, -0.5), (135, -0.75), (160, -0.15)

f1f2 d(f1 d) (f1 d)

8. ,

f1 f2 d f1 f2 d

9. 15cm, -1.5, 1.5cm below RS, 0.3cm above RS

10. 15 cm

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-GOP-56

1

0 d

2

(c) 650 nm, 433.34 nm

15 2r R

20.

32 r

LEVEL I

1. (B) 2. (B)

3. (D) 4. (A)

5. (D) 6. (A)

7. (B) 8. (A)

9. (C) 10. (D)

11. (C) 12. (B)

13. (A) 14. (C)

15. (A) 16. (A)

17. (B) 18. (C)

19. (B) 20. (B)

21. (C) 22. (B)

23. (A) 24. (A)

25. (D) 26. (D)

27. (C) 28. (A)

29. (A) 30. (A)

31. (B) 32. (C)

33. (B) 34. (A)

35. (C) 36. (A)

37. (A) 38. (D)

39. (A) 40. (A)

LEVEL II

1. (A), (C) 2. (A), (B), (C)

3. (A), (B), (C), (D) 4. (A), (B)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-GOP-57

7. (D) 8. (A), (D)

9. (A), (B), (C) 10. (D)

COMPREHENSION

1. (A) 2. (D)

3. (B) 4. (B)

5. (D) 6. (D)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-MP-35

MODERN PHYSICS

9. Assignment (Subjective Problems)

LEVEL - I

from L to K shell is found to be 4.2 1018 Hz. Using Moseleys law, find the

atomic number of the element, given that the Rydbergs constant R=1.1 107 m 1.

2. A radioactive sample emits n -particles in 2 sec. In next 2 sec it emits 0.75 n

-particle, what is the mean life of the sample?

3. The energy of a K-electron in tungsten is 20 KeV and of an L electron is

2 KeV. Find the wavelength of X-rays emitted when there is electron jump from

L to K shell.

4. One milliwatt of light of wavelength 4560 is incident on a cesium surface.

Calculate the photoelectric current produced, if the efficiency of the surface for

photoelectric emission is only 0.5%.

5. If the wavelength of the light falling on a surface is increased from 3000 to

3040 , then what will be the corresponding change in the stopping potential?

(Given that hc = 12.4 103 eV )

6. In an experiment on photoelectric emission, following observations were made:

(i) Wavelength of the incident light = 1.98 10 7 m, (ii) stopping potential = 2.5

volt. Find threshold frequency, work-function and energy of photoelectrons with

maximum speed. (Given e = 1.6 10 19 C, h = 6.6 10 34 J-s., c = 3 108 m/s)

7. Light of wavelength 180 nm ejects photo-electrons from a plate of metal whose

work-function is 2 eV. If a uniform magnetic field of 5 10 5 Tesla be applied

parallel to the plate, what would be the radius of the path followed by electrons

ejected normally from the plates with maximum energy (h = 6.62 10 34 J-s,

m = 9.1 10 31 kg and e = 1.6 10 19 coulomb).

8. Photoelectric threshold wavelength of metallic silver is = 3800 . Ultra-violet

light of = 2600 is incident on silver surface. Calculate

(a) the value of work function in joule and eV,

(b) maximum Kinetic energy of the emitted photo electrons,

(c) the maximum velocity of the photo electrons.

(Mass of the electron=9.11 10 31 kg).

9. Consider the fusion reaction 1H2 + 1H3 2He4. If 20 MeV of energy is released

per fusion reaction, mass of 1H2 consumed per day is 0.1 gm, what is the Power

of the reactor?

10. The radiation emitted due to de-excitation of electron from n=2 to n=1 in H2 atom

falls on a metal to produce photo electrons. The electrons from the metal surface

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-MP-36

with maximum kinetic energy are made to move perpendicular to a magnetic field

1

of T in a radius 10-3m. Find the threshold wavelength for the metal.

160

LEVEL II

1. A hydrogen atom moving with a velocity 6.24 104 m/s makes a perfectly

inelastic head on collision with another stationary hydrogen atom. Both atoms are

in ground state before collision. Up to what state either one atom may be excited.

2. An X-ray tube with a copper target is found to emit lines other than those due to

copper. The K line of copper is known to have a wavelength 1.5405 A 0 and the

other two K lines observed have wavelengths 0.7092 A0 and 1.6578 A0. Identify

the impurities (find the value of Z, atomic number). What is the minimum voltage

at which the X-ray tube should be operated?

3. Radiation falls on a target kept within a solenoid with 20 turns per cm, carrying a

current 2.5 A. Electrons emitted move in a circle with a maximum radius of 1 cm.

Find the wavelength of radiation, given that the work function of the target is 0.5

volts, e = 1.6 10 19 coulomb, h = 6.625 10 34 J s, m = 9.1 10 31 Kg.

4. Electrons in a hydrogen like atom (Z = 3) make transitions from 5th to 4th orbit

and from the 4th to the 3rd orbit. The resulting radiation is incident normally on a

metal plate and the photo- electrons are ejected. The stopping potential for the

photoelectrons ejected by light of shorter wavelength is 3.95V. Calculate the

work function of the metal and the stopping potential the photo electrons for the

longer wavelength.

V2=20 KV, the wavelength interval between the K -line and the short wavelength

cut-off of the continuous X-ray spectrum increases by a factor of 3. Find the

atomic number of the element of the target.

30 eV when monochromatic radiation of wavelength falls on it. When the same

surface is illuminated with light of wavelength 2 , the maximum kinetic energy

photo electrons is observed to be 10 eV. Calculate the wavelength and

determine the maximum wavelength of incident radiation for which

photoelectrons can be emitted by this surface.

(h = 6.62 10 34 J-S = 4.14 10 15 eV-s, c = 3 108 m/s)

produces a pressure of 5 x 10-7 N/m2 on it. Assuming that 25% of the light

incident is reflected and the rest absorbed, find the number of photons falling per

second on a unit area of thin surface.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-MP-37

events must be required in a second to attain this power level? Assume that this

explosion is designed with nuclear fuel consisting of uranium -235. Calculate the

amount of fuel needed to run a reactor at this power level for one year. You can

assume that the amount of energy released per fission event is 200 MeV.

300

revolving in the anti-clockwise direction in a circular orbit of

radius R.

(a) Obtain an expression for the orbital magnetic dipole moment

of the electron.

(b) The atom is placed in a uniform magnetic induction B such

that the plane normal to the electron orbit makes an angle

30o with the magnetic induction. Find the torque experienced

by the orbiting electron.

decay constant 2. Assuming that at the initial moment the preparation contained

only the radionuclide A1, find:

(a) the equation describing accumulation of the radionuclide A2.

(b) the time interval after which the activity of radionuclide A2 reaches the

maximum value. Assume concentration of A1 at t = 0 to be No.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-MP-38

LEVEL I

1. The total energy of the electron in the hydrogen atom in the ground state is 13.6 eV.

Which of the following is its kinetic energy in the first excited state?

(A) 13.6 eV (B) 6.8 eV

(C) 3.4 eV (D) 1.825 eV

2. A freshly prepared radioactive source of half life 2 hrs emits radiation of intensity

which is 32 times the permissible safe value of intensity. Which of the following is the

minimum time after which it would be possible to work safely with this source?

(A) 16 hrs (B) 5 hrs

(C) 10 hrs (D) 32 hrs

3. The ionisation potential of a hydrogen atom is 13.6 volt. The energy required to

remove an electron from the second orbit of hydrogen is:

(A) 3.4 eV (B) 6.8 eV

(C) 13.6 eV (D) 27.2 eV

4. The radius of the first Bohr orbit is a0. The nth orbit has a radius:

(A) na0 (B) a0/n

2

(C) n a0 (D) a0/n2

(A) 13.6 eV (B) 13.6 11 eV

(C) (13.6/11) eV (D) 13.6 (112) eV

(A) 0.53 A0 (B) 1.06 A0

0

(C) 0.265 A (D) 0.132 A0

emitted radiation:

(A) the maximum wavelength increases

(B) the minimum wave length increases

(C) the minimum wavelength remains unchanged

(D) the minimum wave length decreases

strike a metal target to produce X-rays. For which of the following values of V, the

resulting X-rays have the lowest minimum wave length:

(A) 10 KV (B) 20 KV

(C) 30 KV (D) 40 KV

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-MP-39

(A) is monochromatic

(B) contains all wavelengths smaller than a certain maximum wavelength

(C) contains all wave lengths larger than a certain minimum wavelength

(D) contains all wave lengths lying between a minimum and a maximum wavelength.

10. The relation between half-life T of a radioactive sample and its mean life is:

(A) T = 0.693 (B) = 0.693 T

(C) = T (D) = 2.718 T

11. The stopping potential for the photo electrons emitted from a metal surface of work

function 1.7 eV is 10.4 V. Identify the energy levels corresponding to the transitions

in hydrogen atom which will result in emission of wavelength equal to that of incident

radiation for the above photoelectric effect

(A) n = 3 to 1 (B) n = 3 to 2

(C) n = 2 to 1 (D) n = 4 to 1

12. An electron collides with a fixed hydrogen atom in its ground state. Hydrogen atom

gets excited and the colliding electron loses all its kinetic energy. Consequently the

hydrogen atom may emit a photon corresponding to the largest wavelength of the

Balmer series. The K.E. of colliding electron will be

(A) 10.2 eV (B) 1.9 eV

(C) 12.1 eV (D) 13.6 eV

13. When a radioactive isotope 88Ra228 decays in series by the emission of three -

particles and a particle the isotope finally formed is :

(A) 84X220 (B) 86X222

216

(C) 83X (D) 83X215

14. Photo electric effect supports the quantum nature of light because:

(A) there is a minimum frequency of light below which no photo electrons are

emitted.

(B) the maximum K.E. of photoelectrons depends only on the frequency of light

and not on its intensity.

(C) even when the metal surface is faintly illuminated by light of the approximate

wavelength, the photo electrons leave the surface immediately.

(D) electric charge of photoelectrons is quantized.

15. If the electron in the hydrogen atoms is excited to n = 5 state, the number of

frequencies present in the radiation emitted is :

(A) 4 (B) 5

(C) 8 (D) 10

16. The ratio of magnetic dipole moment of an electron of charge e and mass m in the

Bohr orbit in hydrogen to the angular momentum of the electron in the orbit is:

(A) e/m (B) e/2m

(C) m/e (D) 2m/e

17. The wave length of K -ray line of an anticathode element of atomic number Z is

nearly proportional to:

(A) Z2 (B) (Z 1)2

1 1

(C) (D)

( Z 1) (Z 1)2

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-MP-40

18. If 1 and 2 are the wavelengths of characteristic X-ray and gamma rays

respectively, then the relation between them is :

(A) 1 2 (B) 1 = 2

(C) 1 > 2 (D) 1 < 2

1H + X then the nucleus X is :

(A) Nitrogen of mass 16 (B) Nitrogen of mass 17

(C) Oxygen of mass 16 (D) Oxygen of mass 17

20. If 10% of a radioactive material decays in 5 days, then the amount of the original

material left after 20 days is approximately:

(A) 60% (B) 65%

(C) 70% (D) 75%

LEVEL II

1. Suppose the potential energy between electron and proton at a distance r is given by

Ke 2

. Application of Bohrs theory of hydrogen atom in this case shows that :

3r 3

(A) energy in the nth orbit is proportional to n6

(B) energy is proportional to m 3 (m : mass of electron)

(C) energy in the nth orbit is proportional to n 2

(D) energy is proportional to m3 (m = mass of electron)

2. X ray from a tube with a target A of atomic number Z shows strong K lines for target A

and weak K lines for impurities. The wavelength of K lines is z for target A and 1 and

2 for two impurities.

z 1

4 and z .

1 2 4

Screening constant of K lines to be unity. Select the correct statement(s)

(A) The atomic number of first impurity is 2z 1.

(B) The atomic number of first impurity is 2z + 1.

(z 1)

(C) The atomic number of second impurity is .

2

z

(D) The atomic number of second impurity is 1.

2

3. Energy liberated in the deexcitation of hydrogen atom from 3rd level to 1st level falls on

a photocathode. Later when the same photocathode is exposed to a spectrum of

some unknown hydrogen like gas, excited to 2 nd energy level, it is found that the de

Broglie wavelength of the fastest photoelectrons, now ejected has decreased by a factor

of 3. For this new gas, difference of energies of 2 nd Lyman line and 1st Balmer line is

found to be 3 times the ionization potential of the hydrogen atom. Select the correct

statement(s) :

(A) The gas is lithium.

(B) The gas is helium.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-MP-41

(D) The work function of photocathode is 5.5 eV.

6 different wavelengths of which two wavelengths are shorter than 0.

(A) The final excited state of the atoms is n = 4

(B) The initial state of the atoms may be n = 2

(C) The initial state of the atoms may be n = 3

(D) There are three transitions belonging to Lyman series.

5. For a certain radioactive substance, it is observed that after 4 hours, only 6.25% of the

original sample is left undecayed. If follows that

(A) the half life of the sample is 1 hour

(B) the mean life of the sample is 1 hour

ln2

(C) the decay constant of the sample is ln 2 hour-1

(D) after a further 4 hours, the amount of the substance left over would by only 0.39% of

the original amount

6. Let 1 be the frequency of the series limit of the Lyman series, 2 be the frequency of the

first line of the Lyman series, and 3 be the frequency of the series limit of the Balmer

series

(A) 1 2 3 (B) 2 1 3

1

(C) 3 ( 1 2) (D) 1 2 3

2

2. An electron in a hydrogen atom makes a transition from n = n1 to n = n2. The time period

of the electron in the initial state is eight times that in the final state. The possible values

of n1 and n2 are

(A) n1 = 4, n2 = 2 (B) n1 = 8, n 2 = 2

(C) n1 = 8, n2= 1 (D) n1 = 6, n 2 = 3

(A) it may emit another photon in Balmer series

(B) it must emit another photon in Lyman series

(C) the second photon, if emitted, will have a wavelength of about 122 nm

(D) it may emit a second photon, but the wavelength of this photon cannot be predicted

4. When an electron moving at a high speed strikes a metal surface, which of the following

are possible ?

(A) the entire energy of the electron may be converted into an X-ray photon

(B) any fraction of the energy of the electron may be converted into an X-ray photon

(C) the entire energy of the electron may get converted to heat

(D) the electron may under go elastic collision with the metal surface

5. There are two radioactive nuclei A and B. A is an alpha emitter and B is a beta emitter.

Their disintegration constants are in ratio of 1 : 2. What should be the ratio of number of

atoms of A and B at any time t so that probabilities of getting alpha and beta particle are

same at that instant

(A) 2 : 1 (B) 1 : 2

(C) 3 (D) e-1

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-MP-42

6. An electron in hydrogen atom first jumps from second excited state to first excited state

and then from first excited state to ground state. Let the ratio of wavelength, momentum

and energy of photons emitted in these two cases be a, b and c respectively. Then

1 9

(A) c (B) a

a 4

5 5

(C) b (D) c

27 27

7. The wavelengths and frequencies of photons in transitions 1, 2 and 1

3 for hydrogen like atom are 1, 2, 3, 1, 2 and 3 respectively.

Then 3

2

(A) 3 1 2 (B) 3

1 2

1 2

(C) 3 1 2 (D) 3

1 2

1 2

(A) the number of photons emitted by the source in unit time increases

(B) the total energy of the photons emitted per unit time increases

(C) more energetic photons are emitted

(D) faster photons are emitted

(A) the photoelectric emission will not take place

(B) the photoelectric emission may or may not take place

(C) the stopping potential will increase

(D) the stopping potential will decrease

10. The collector plate in an experiment on photoelectric effect is kept vertically above the

emitter plate. Light source is put on and a saturation photocurrent is recorded. An

electric field is switched on which has a vertically downward direction.

(A) the photocurrent will increase

(B) the kinetic energy of the electrons will increase

(C) the stopping potential will decrease

(D) the threshold wavelength will increase

COMPREHENSION

I : [Question No. 1 to 3]

Many unstable nuclei can decay spontaneously to a nucleus of lower mass but different

combination of nucleons. The process of spontaneous emission of radiation is called

radioactivity. Three types of radiations are emitted by radioactive substance.

Radioactive decay is a statistical process. Radioactivity is independent of all external conditions.

The number of decay per unit time or decay rate is called activity. Activity exponentially

decreases with time.

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-MP-43

(A) Radioactivity is statistical process

(B) Radioactivity is independent of high temperature and high pressure

(C) When a nucleus undergoes or decay, its atomic number changes

(D) All of these

2. If the decay constants of a radioactive element for and decay are 1 and 2

respectively. The total decay constant ( ) is :

(A) 1 2

(B) 1 2

1 2 1 2

(C) 1 2 (D) 1 2

3. The activity of radioactive substance is R1 at time t1 and R2 at time t2 ( > t1) the decay

constant is

(A) R1t1 R 2 t 2 (B) R2 R1e ( t2 t1 )

R R2

(C) R2 R1e ( t1 t 2 ) (D) 1 constant

t 2 t1

II : [Question No. 4 to 6]

All nuclei consist of two type of particles protons and neutrons. Nuclear force is the strongest

force. Stability of nucleus is determined by the neutron proton ratio or mass defect or Binding

energy per nucleons or packing fraction. Shape of nucleus calculated by quadrupole moment.

Spin of nucleus depends on even or odd mass number. Volume of nucleus depends on the

mass number. Whole mass of atom (nearly 99%) is centred at the nucleus. Magnetic moment of

nucleus measured by the nuclear magnetons.

(A) Charge independent (B) Short ranges forces

(C) Non conservative force (D) All option are correct

(A) V A2 (B) V A1/3

2/3

(C) V A (D) V A

6. The mass defect in a particular nuclear reaction is 0.5 gram. The amount of heat energy

liberated in Joule is

(A) 4.5 10 13 Joule (B) 45 1016 Joule

15

(C) 45 10 Joule (D) 0.5 931 Joule

Column I Column II

(A) Particle behaviour of light (p) Reflection

(B) Electron microscope (q) Refraction

(C) Xray photon (r) Interference

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-MP-44

2. Some quantities related to the photoelectric effect are mentioned under Column I and

Column II. Match each quantity in Column I with the corresponding quantities in Column

II on which it depends.

Column I Column II

(A) Saturation current (p) Frequency of light

(B) Stopping potential (q) Work function

(C) de-Broglie wavelength of photoelectron (r) Area of photosensitive plate

(D) Force due to radiation falling on the (s) Intensity of light (at constant

photoplate. frequency)

Column I Column II

(A) decay (p) For atoms of high atomic number

(B) Fusion (q) Mass energy equivalence

(C) Fission (r) For atoms of low atomic number

(D) Exothermic nuclear reaction (s) Involves weak forces

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-MP-45

LEVEL I

1 2

1. 42 2. sec

ln(4 / 3)

5. -0.055 V

7. 0.148 m.

8. (a) 5.23 10-19 J, 3.27 eV (b) 1.5 eV (c) 0.7289 106 m/s

LEVEL II

eh ehB 1 1t 2t

9. ; 10. N2 = N0 e e

4 m 8 m 2 1

LEVEL I

1. C 2. C

3. A 4. C

5. D 6. B

7. D 8. D

9. C 10. A

11. A 12. C

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

RSM79-PH-P5-MP-46

13. C 14. C

15. D 16. B

17. D 18. C

19. D 20. B

LEVEL II

3. (B), (C) 4. (A), (B), (D)

5. (A), (B), (C), (D) 6. (A)

7. (A), (D) 8. (B), (C)

9. (A), (B), (C) 10. (A)

11. (A), (C), (D) 12. (A), (D)

13. (A), (B) 14. (B), (D)

15. (B)

COMPREHENSION

1. (D) 2. (C)

3. (B) 4. (D)

5. (D) 6. (A)

1. (A) (p), (q), (s); (B) (r); (C) (p), (q), (r), (s); (D) (q)

2. (A) (s); (B) (p), (q); (C) (p), (q); (D) (p), (r), (s)

3. (A) (q), (s); (B) (q), (r); (C) (p), (q); (D) (q)

FIITJEE Ltd., ICES House, Sarvapriya Vihar (Near Hauz Khas Bus Term.), New Delhi - 16, Ph : 26515949 , 26865182, 26569493, Fax : 26513942

- Mechanics NotesUploaded byPunit Badal
- Examples 4Uploaded byKrisha Ann M. Mendoza
- Experiment 2 Kinematics of Human MotionUploaded byAldrin Agawin
- Circular, Periodic and Rotational MotionUploaded byMelissa A. Bernardo
- Derivation Kinematic EqnsUploaded byuploader
- Logical Reasoning (32)Uploaded byChantal Foleri
- Circular MotionUploaded byKapil_1983
- Kinema TicsUploaded byAsif Rasheed Rajput
- 35SliderCrankMechanism (1)Uploaded byNAGU2009
- Free Fall example 1Uploaded bydebbyhooi
- P182A-05.042.Newtons2ndLawUploaded byUgur ASİT
- m1 - Revision ChecklistUploaded bymariampasha
- Class 9 Science 8Uploaded byAsif Hoda
- Capa BatmanUploaded byos_rubens
- I1Uploaded byTopgun An Anomaly
- 9th Science Physics Sample Paper 2012Uploaded byvishal_bokaro
- 11_kinematics_wksht2Uploaded byKingom 885
- forzeUploaded byFabio Cottafavi
- 01_Kinematics.pdfUploaded byVatsal
- fhdfghfdghUploaded byKokipro Kokipro
- MechanicsUploaded byShams Shams
- chapter3and4project part2 docxUploaded byapi-308136105
- Calculate the Acceleration of a PendulumUploaded byLeo Kuts
- KinameticsUploaded byVeer
- Lab 8a Rotation1Uploaded byKamran
- Lesson Plan3Uploaded byJhiela Mae Macaraig
- AM02Uploaded byAndenet Ashagrie
- Pan Tilt Command Reference Manual(1)Uploaded byAbdul Basit
- DimensionUploaded byManoranjan Swain
- unit 6 synopsisUploaded byapi-217292555